009-3293-221 (5400 R4.5 CommTest) RevA

5400 Packet-Optical Platform
Commissioning and Testing

Release 4.5
What’s inside...
Preparation
Power
Hardware and software installation
System operation tests
5400 Switch cabling
Commissioning, testing, and expansion procedures
Installation data sheets
Proper module handling
Optical specifications
009-3293-221 - Standard Revision A

January 2019
Copyright© 2010-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE
OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE.
REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN
AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS
COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to
change without notice. For the most up-to-date technical publications, visit www.ciena.com.
Copyright© 2010-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and
other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored
in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena
Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com
Customer Technical Support/Warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA-24 (243-6224)
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
and Africa +44-207-012-5508
00 0800 77 454 (Slovenia)
In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
120 11104 (Vietnam)
000 8004401369 (India)
In Caribbean and Latin 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
America 1230-020-0845 (Chile)
009 800-2436-2247 (Colombia)
0800-77-454 (Mexico and Peru)
00 008000442510 (Panama)
Sales and General Information North America: 1-800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
International: +44 20 7012 5555
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-22-42419600 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training E-mail: learning@ciena.com
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

Release 4.5 009-3293-221 Standard Revision A
Copyright© 2010-2019 Ciena® Corporation January 2019
READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING CIENA
SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION. THIS LICENSE IS AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND CIENA
COMMUNICATIONS, INC. (OR, AS APPLICABLE, SUCH OTHER CIENA CORPORATION AFFILIATE
LICENSOR) (“CIENA”) GOVERNING YOUR RIGHTS TO USE THE SOFTWARE. BY INSTALLING OR USING
THE SOFTWARE, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AND AGREE TO BE BOUND
BY IT.
1. License Grant. Ciena may provide “Software” to you either (1) embedded within or running on a hardware
product or (2) as a standalone application, and Software includes upgrades acquired by you from Ciena or a Ciena
authorized reseller. Subject to these terms, and payment of all applicable License fees including any usage-based
fees, Ciena grants you, as end user, a non-exclusive, non-transferable, personal License to use the Software only in
object code form and only for its intended use as evidenced by the applicable product documentation. Unless the
context does not permit, Software also includes associated documentation.
2. Open Source and Third Party Licenses. Software excludes any open source or third-party programs supplied
by Ciena under a separate license, and you agree to be bound by the terms of any such license. If a separate
license is not provided, any open source and third party programs are considered “Software” and their use
governed by the terms of this License.
3. Title. You are granted no title or ownership rights in or to the Software. Unless specifically authorized by Ciena in
writing, you are not authorized to create any derivative works based upon the Software. Title to the Software,
including any copies or derivative works based thereon, and to all copyrights, patents, trade secrets and other
intellectual property rights in or to the Software, are and shall remain the property of Ciena and/or its licensors.
Ciena's licensors are third party beneficiaries of this License. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in
the Software not expressly granted to you.
4. Confidentiality. The Software contains trade secrets of Ciena. Such trade secrets include, without limitation, the
design, structure and logic of individual Software programs, their interactions with other portions of the Software,
internal and external interfaces, and the programming techniques employed. The Software and related technical
and commercial information, and other information received in connection with the purchase and use of the
Software that a reasonable person would recognize as being confidential, are all confidential information of Ciena
(“Confidential Information”).
5. Obligations. You shall:
i) Hold the Software and Confidential Information in strict confidence for the benefit of Ciena using your best efforts
to protect the Software and Confidential Information from unauthorized disclosure or use, and treat the Software
and Confidential Information with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but no less than
reasonable care;
ii) Keep a current record of the location of each copy of the Software you make;
iii) Use the Software only in accordance with the authorized usage level;
iv) Preserve intact any copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership on any original or copies of
the Software, and affix to each copy of the Software you make, in the same form and location, a reproduction of the
copyright notices, trademarks, and all other proprietary legends and/or logos appearing on the original copy of the
Software delivered to you; and
v) Issue instructions to your authorized personnel to whom Software is disclosed, advising them of the confidential
nature of the Software and provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License.
6. Restrictions. You shall not:
i) Use the Software or Confidential Information a) for any purpose other than your own internal business purposes;
and b) other than as expressly permitted by this License;
ii) Allow anyone other than your authorized personnel who need to use the Software in connection with your rights
or obligations under this License to have access to the Software;
iii) Make any copies of the Software except such limited number of copies, in machine readable form only, as may
be reasonably necessary for execution in accordance with the authorized usage level or for archival purposes only;
iv) Make any modifications, enhancements, adaptations, derivative works, or translations to or of the Software;
v) Reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile, or in any other manner decode the Software;
vi) Make full or partial copies of the associated documentation or other printed or machine-readable matter provided
with the Software unless it was supplied by Ciena in a form intended for reproduction;
vii) Export or re-export the Software from the country in which it was received from Ciena or its authorized reseller
unless authorized by Ciena in writing; or

viii) Publish the results of any benchmark tests run on the Software.
7. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request you shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software to ensure
compliance with this License.
8. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Software and any accompanying technical
data (collectively “Materials”) are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. The
Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
License, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement
227.7202, the Software is commercial computer software and the use of the Software is further restricted by this
License.
9. Term of License. This License is effective until the applicable subscription period expires or the License is
terminated. You may terminate this License by giving written notice to Ciena. This License will terminate
immediately if (i) you breach any term or condition of this License or (ii) you become insolvent, cease to carry on
business in the ordinary course, have a receiver appointed, enter into liquidation or bankruptcy, or any analogous
process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies Ciena may
have. Upon any termination of this License you shall destroy and erase all copies of the Software in your
possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been
destroyed or erased. Your obligations to hold the Confidential Information in confidence, as provided in this License,
shall survive the termination of this License.
10. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all laws related to your installation and use of the Software.
Software is subject to U.S. export control laws, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other
countries. If Ciena authorizes you to import or export the Software in writing, you shall obtain all necessary licenses
or permits and comply with all applicable laws.
11. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF CIENA SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE
AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU TO CIENA OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF
CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER
TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY LICENSOR OF
CIENA. NEITHER CIENA NOR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR
DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING
SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE.
12. General. Ciena may assign this License to an affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights in the
Software. You shall not assign or transfer this License or any rights hereunder, and any attempt to do so will be void.
This License shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflict of laws provisions.
The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This License
constitutes the complete and exclusive agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and
supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the
parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force
and effect.

i
Publication history 0
January 2019
Standard Revision A.
This is the first standard release of this document for Release 4.5.

ii Publication history

iii
Contents 0
Publication history i
About this document vii
New in this release and documentation roadmap xi
1- Preparation 1-1
Prerequisites 1-1
Required tools and equipment 1-2
Preparatory activities 1-3
2- Power 2-1
Prerequisites - 5430 Switch 2-2
Prerequisites - 5410 Switch 2-2
Shock hazard from dual power sources 2-4
Verifying 5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolation 2-5
Verifying 5430 Switch external load and return voltages 2-10
Powering up the 5430 Switch 2-13
Verifying 5410 Switch A/B return and -48v terminal isolation 2-17
Verifying 5410 Switch external load and return voltages 2-20
Powering up the 5410 Switch 2-22
3- Hardware and software installation 3-1

Installing modules 3-5
Installing and configuring the primary CTM 3-12
Verifying system software 3-21
Upgrading the primary CTM software 3-23
Transferring the primary CTM software 3-26
Installing and configuring the secondary CTM 3-33
Installing the Node Manager application 3-36
Launching Node Manager 3-38
Testing line module slot 3-41
4- System operation tests 4-1

Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed 4-2
Testing fan alarm and verifying node manager alarms 4-5
Verifying Line Module Status from Node Manager 4-9
Verifying SM Status from Node Manager 4-11

iv Contents
Change line module port group mode 4-14

Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED Status 4-15
100G line module traffic testing using 10G client traffic 4-30
Performing Redundancy Checks 4-44
Performing the final system stability test 4-49
5- 5400 Switch cabling 5-1

Connecting Site Cables 5-2
Connecting Site Fiber Optic Cables 5-6
Operating the (handheld) optical fiber scope 5-10
6- Commissioning, testing, and expansion procedures 6-1

Procedures 6-1
Connecting to the CTM and using a laptop to connect to the console port 6-3
Connect and log on to Node Manager via Ethernet interface 6-5
Adding 5400 Switch channel capacity 6-8
Measuring optical power level 6-12
Testing spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Line Modules 6-16
Test single eSLM module 6-17
Test multiple eSLM modules 6-33
Configure 10G and 100G test sets for eSLM test 6-45
Testing spare CTMs 6-52
Testing spare Switch Modules 6-54
Testing spare Fans 6-56
Test line modules, SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 and unequipped LM slots 6-57
Removing, deleting or installing an pluggable optic 6-67
Test 5400 Switch LEDs 6-74
Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure 6-76
Using the 5430 Switch fiber management tool 6-78
Decommissioning a 5430 switch 6-82
7- Installation data sheets 7-1

Section A: Site Information and pre-test check list 7-2
Section B: 5430 Switch installation discrepancy list 7-3
Section C: Ground tests 7-4
Section D: A/B RTN terminal isolation tests 7-4
Section E: A/B -48V terminal isolation tests 7-6
Section F: PDU-A and PDU-B power verification 7-8
Section G: CTM configuration parameters 7-8
Section H: SONET BITS cable test 7-9
Section I: SDH SSU cable test 7-9
Section J: Power feed LED status 7-10
Section K: Software version 7-11
Section L: Fan alarm generation 7-11
Section M: LM LED status and functional test 7-12
Section N: Module LED status and redundancy tests 7-41
Section O: LED test 7-42
Section P: Spare hardware inventory and testing 7-43

Contents v
8- Proper module handling 8-1

Required Tools 8-1
Prerequisites 8-2
Reference Documents 8-2
Handling and storing modules 8-3
Removing a module from an anti-static bag 8-5
Inserting a module into an anti-static bag 8-6
Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Circuit Packs during Installation 8-7
9- Optical specifications 9-1

Overview 9-1
B-700-1036-00x OPT-SR1/OPT-LX transceiver specifications 9-4
B-730-0001-00x OPT-IR1 transceiver specifications 9-6
160-9011-90x OPT-LR-1 transceiver specifications 9-7
160-9012-90x OPT-LR-2 Multi-rate transceiver specifications 9-8
B-700-1016-001 GigE 1000Base-SX transceiver specifications 9-9
B-700-1016-002 GigE 1000Base-LX transceiver specifications 9-11
162-0093-900 GigE 1000Base-ZX transceiver specifications 9-13
B-730-0004-001 GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T specifications 9-15
B-700-1035-00x GE 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM SFP specifications 9-16
B-730-0006-0xx Multi-rate 15xx.yy nm SFP specifications 9-18
160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10Km SFP+
specifications 9-20
160-9104-900 10GBASE-ER/FC1200, 1550nm, 40km, SFP+ specifications 9-22
160-9105-900 10GBASE-ZR, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ specifications 9-24
160-9201-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1565.50 nm Tunable, 50GHz, Type 1
DWDM SFP+ specifications 9-26
160-9204-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 40 km SFP+
specifications 9-29
Multi-rate SFP+ 80km 9-31
130-4904-900 XFP-OPT-SR transceiver specifications 9-34
130-4905-90x XFP-OPT-LR transceiver specifications 9-36
130-4906-90x XFP-EXT-ER transceiver specifications 9-39
130-4907-90x XFP-EXT-UR transceiver specifications 9-42
160-9002-900 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50 GHz Tunable DWDM XFP
specifications 9-45
160-9004-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable Type 2
DWDM XFP specifications 9-49
134-5495-900 AM-XFP tunable transceiver specifications 9-53
160-9013-900 41.2G- 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP
specifications 9-54
NTTA11AA 40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP
specifications 9-56
NTTA11BAE6 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
specifications 9-58
NTTA12BAE6 39.8G-44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
specifications 9-60
NTTA13EEE6 39.8G-44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP

vi Contents
specifications 9-62
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs
(40G line interface) 9-64
NTTA03AA 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP
specifications 9-66
NTTA03BJE6 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
specifications 9-68
160-9113-900 103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
specifications 9-70
Dual rate QSFP+ specifications 9-72
160-9114-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
specifications 9-75
specifications 9-77
160-9300-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km CFP2
specifications 9-80
160-9301-900 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km CFP2
specifications 9-83
160-9310-900 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100 m, MPO CFP2
specifications 9-85
specifications 9-88
WaveLogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO 9-90
WaveLogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO 9-91
180-1120-900 WaveLogic Enhanced-2.0 CFP2-ACO specifications 9-93
160-9505-900: 4x10GBASE-LR, SMF, 1310nm, 10km, MPO QSFP+ 9-95
160-9400-900: 100GBASE-SR4, 4x25G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO
QSFP28 9-97
160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km
QSFP28 9-99
160-9402-900: 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km
QSFP28 9-101
160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km
QSFP28 9-104
160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm, 40km QSFP28 9-106
160-9460-xxx: 103.1G-112.28G, 3m, QSFP28-QSFP28 AOC 9-109
xSLM-1-WL3 and OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e transceiver specifications 9-111
5400 40G DWDM wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) 9-114
5400 Switch 100G DWDM wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) 9-115

vii
About this document 0
This manual provides a detailed description of the turn-up, testing, and

expansion for a Ciena® 5430 Packet-Optical Platform and 5410 Packet-
Optical Platform. The 5430 Packet-Optical Platform and 5410 Packet-Optical
Platform are hereinafter referred to as 5400 Switch.
This manual supplies information about all aspects of turn-up and test,
including preparation, installing all grounding and power, loading system
software, installing circuit packs, testing the system, and cabling. This manual
can be used as a guide for customers, field technicians, operators, and all
other personnel involved in the turn-up and test process of the 5400 Switch.
The division of tasks between installation personnel and test personnel may
vary with the site and the installation requirements of the particular customer.
Some tasks included in this manual may be performed by installation
personnel at certain sites; such tasks are noted in the procedures.
For more information about tasks performed during installation, the user
should refer to the Hardware Installation Manual.
Disclaimer
While every effort has been made to ensure that this document is complete
and accurate at the time of release, the information that it contains is subject
to change. Ciena® is not responsible for any additions to or alterations of the
original document. Networks vary widely in their configurations, topologies,
and traffic conditions. This document is intended as a general guide only. It
has not been tested for all possible applications, and it may not be complete
or accurate for some situations.
Trademark Acknowledgments
• CoreDirector® FS Multiservice Optical Switch and CoreDirector® FSCI
Multiservice Optical Switch are registered trademarks of Ciena
Corporation.
• Windows® XP, Windows® NT, and Windows® 7 are registered trademarks
of the Microsoft Corporation.

viii About this document
• Microsoft is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This product
includes code licensed from RSA Data Security.
Intended audience
This document is intended for customers, certified system installation
technicians, test engineers, technical support technicians, and other
personnel responsible for operating the 5400 Switch. All 5400 Switch
personnel are required to read, understand, and observe the safety
precautions described in the appropriate product manuals. It assumes that the
intended users possess basic knowledge of, but not limited to:
• OTN, SONET/SDH, and Ethernet concepts
• IEEE standards
• Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Seven Layer Model
• Local Area Networks (LAN)
• Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)
Document conventions
This section describes conventions that outline specific categories of
information throughout this document.
Symbols
Symbols denote text that requires special attention. The information contained
alongside a symbol corresponds to one of the following levels:
DANGER
Risk of personal injury
This symbol is used to highlight information so the user can
avoid personal injury.
CAUTION
Equipment damage or data loss
This symbol is used to highlight information so the user can
avoid equipment damage or data loss.
Related documentation
The following list contains the names of the related documents in the suite:
• System Description (009-3293-100)

About this document ix
• 5430 Hardware Installation (009-3293-201.1)

• 5410 Hardware Installation (009-3293-201.2)
• 5430 15Tb Upgrade (009-3293-201.3)
• 5430 PDU Upgrade (009-3293-201.4)
• 5410 5Tb Upgrade (009-3293-201.5)
• Commissioning and Testing (009-3293-221)
• TL-1 Description (009-3293-190)
• Node Manager Fundamentals (009-3293-195)
• Administration and Security (009-3293-301)
• Configuration - Provisioning and Operating (009-3293-310)
• Configuration - Protection Services (009-3293-320)
• Configuration - Control Plane (009-3293-330)
• Fault Management - Performance Monitoring (009-3293-520)
• Fault Management - Alarm Clearing (009-3293-543)
• Fault Management - Module Replacement (009-3293-545)
• SAOS Command Reference (009-3293-610)
• SAOS Configuration (009-3293-630)
• SAOS Event Reference (009-3293-650)
• SAOS MPLS Configuration (009-3293-670)
• SAOS MIB Reference (009-3293-690)
Document Ordering Information

To order additional documentation, the user can contact the local sales
representative or Ciena through the contact numbers and/or e-mail addresses
listed on the back of the front cover.
Document Comments
Ciena appreciates all comments that will help us to improve our
documentation quality. The user can submit comments through the Ciena web
site (http://www.ciena.com).
Additional Product Information

Additional product information can be obtained by contacting the local sales
representative or Ciena through the contact numbers and/or e-mail addresses
listed on the back of the front cover.

x About this document

xi
New in this release and documentation

roadmap 0
This technical publication provides a detailed description of the turn-up,

testing, and expansion for a Ciena® 5430 Packet-Optical Platform and 5410
Packet-Optical Platform.
Release 4.5 Revision A

This issue includes the following changes:
• Setting the OSRP Node Address during CTM commissioning is now
mandatory. To support this change, Procedure 3-2, Installing and
configuring the primary CTM on page 3-12, was revised.
• The following datasheet was added to Chapter 9, Optical specifications,
for the newly-supported OSLM-5-100G OSFP28 optic:
— Table 9-48, 160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm,
40km QSFP28 Datasheet
Roadmap
This section provides information on the Ciena technical publications library
for 5400 Packet-Optical Platform (5400 Switch). This library is an integral part
of the 5400 Switch product and is considered part of the equipment. Use the
technical publications in the library to complete the tasks needed to set up and
operate the 5400 Switch network elements. The following roadmap illustrates
the structure of the 5400 Switch technical publications library.

xii New in this release and documentation roadmap

1-1
Preparation 1-
This chapter provides overview information about the Ciena® 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform 5430 Switch and 5410 Switch commissioning (turn-up and
test). The 5430 Packet-Optical Platform and 5410 Packet-Optical Platform is
hereinafter referred to as 5400 Switch.
This chapter contains the following information:

• Prerequisites
• Required tools and equipment
• Preparatory activities
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met to successfully complete the 5400
Switch commissioning procedures in this manual.
• The equipment must be installed in accordance with the 5430 Switch
hardware installation manual or 5400 Switch hardware installation
manual. (Refer to Related documentation.)
• Appropriate customer Installation Practices Manual
• Standard Cleaning and Equipment Safety Practices (009-2003-121)
• Ciena® Installation Workmanship Standards, Part Number 009-7B03-000
• Telcordia GR-1275-CORE
• 5400 Switch installation design package (IDP)
• The technician must have access to the system manual. (Refer to Related
documentation.)
• Node Manager software must be installed and running on either a laptop
or site terminal. The revision level of the Node Manager software must be
compatible with the 5400 Switch software.
• The system must have a full compliment of Switch Modules (SMs)
available or installed to allow full turn-up and module testing.
• The technician must be qualified (Ciena®-certified/trained) to perform
commissioning.

1-2 Preparation
• The technician must have knowledge of:

— HyperTerminal and FTP software setup and usage
— The operating system on which Node Manager resides (Windows XP®
or UNIX® operating systems)
— Digital optical test set usage
— Node Manager software
• The technician must have Node Manager Administrator account
privileges.
• All modules being installed must have the correct model number and
revision number.
OSLM-5-WL3n and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e 16QAM power considerations

For information on 5410 Switch 60A Engineering power rules when using high
power OSLM-5-WL3n and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e 16QAM line modules, see
5410 Switch Engineering Power Guidelines and 5410 Switch 60A PDU
Engineering power rules.
For information on 5430 Switch 60A Engineering power rules when using high
power OSLM-5-WL3n and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e 16QAM line modules, see
5430 Switch 60A PDU Engineering Power Guidelines and 5430 Switch 60A
PDU Engineering power rules.
Required tools and equipment

The following tools and equipment must be available to the technician
performing the 5400 Switch commissioning procedures in this manual:
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP/SFTP) application must be made available to
support software upgrades that may be required.
• Personal Computer (PC) running Windows® or UNIX® and equipped with
a Compact Disc Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) or DVD drive and 256
megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM).
• Ethernet 10BaseT crossover or straight cable.
• Serial cable for connection to the CTM. The RJ-45 to sub-D 9 pin cable is
configured for Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or USB to serial adapter.
• Node Manager software (version compatible with loaded 5400 Switch
system software).
• Kimberly-Clark® Kimwipes® EX-L Delicate Task Wipers
• Multimeter
• Flashlight

Preparation 1-3
• Digital optical test set, such as the Agilent 10G OmniBER SONET/SDH
Tester or a similar test set. The test set must be capable of OTN, SONET
and/or SDH Bit Error Rate (BER) testing at a data rate matching the type
of optical interfaces present in the system. The test set must also have the
necessary fiber jumpers (6ft or 2m recommended), FC-to-LC adapters,
SC-to-LC adapters, and a variable attenuator for low-threshold testing.
• Fiber Optic Cleaning Kit (Speer SFO 1400-NN-A or equivalent)
• Optical fiber scope (JDSU™ OLP-82/82P) with adapters
• Multi-wavelength (1310 nm/1550 nm) optical power meter equipped to
adapt to FC, SC, or LC connectors.
ATTENTION
The 5400 Switch supports OTN Services Line Modules (OSLMs), SONET/
SDH Services Line Modules (SSLMs), TDM Services Line Modules (TSLMs)
and Multi Service Line Module (MSLMs) hereinafter referred to as xSLMs.
• LC-to-LC small fiber jumpers for BER testing. The recommended length is
6 inches (15 centimeters). To test a fully populated xSLM, the following
number of jumpers and attenuators are required.
— xSLM-2: 5 jumpers and 4 attenuators
— xSLM-48: 49jumpers and 48 attenuators
— xSLM-50: 51jumpers and 50 attenuators
• LC-to-LC couplers
• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) protection as per local office standards.
Preparatory activities
During the unpacking and installation of the 5400 Switch equipment,
inspection sheets and discrepancy lists should have been completed. Before
starting the commissioning process, the user should review these items and
verify that all issues have been corrected.

1-4 Preparation

2-1
Power 2-
ATTENTION
5400 Switch data sheets are in Installation data sheets.
Before beginning the commissioning process, fill in:
• Section A: Site Information and pre-test check list
• Section C: Ground tests
Ground and power cable testing and connecting for the 5400 Switch is
performed during installation or during commissioning as defined by local
practices and requirements. Because some physical plants require that
installers complete the electrical testing and connections, not all steps
described in this section apply to every commissioning process. Bypass tasks
that do not apply to the specific system being installed.
This chapter contains the following sections:

For the 5430 Switch
• Prerequisites - 5430 Switch
• Verifying 5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolation
• Verifying 5430 Switch external load and return voltages
• Powering up the 5430 Switch
For the 5410 Switch

• Prerequisites - 5410 Switch
• Verifying 5410 Switch A/B return and -48v terminal isolation
• Verifying 5410 Switch external load and return voltages
• Powering up the 5410 Switch

2-2 Power
Prerequisites - 5430 Switch

• The individuals involved in installation must have knowledge of 5400
Switch installations.
• The system must be installed in accordance with the hardware installation
manual list in Related documentation.
• All cabling (power, ground, BITS, Ethernet) routed to the 5400 Switch and
cable ends were prepared as a part of 5400 Switch installation.
Prerequisites - 5410 Switch

• The individuals involved in installation must have knowledge of 5410
Switch installations.
• The system must be installed in accordance with the hardware installation
manual list in Related documentation.
• All cabling (power, ground, BITS, Ethernet) routed to the 5410 Switch and
cable ends were prepared as a part of 5410 Switch installation.
5400 Switch power guidelines

5410 Switch Engineering Power Guidelines and 5410 Switch 60A PDU
Engineering power rules list the line modules (LMs) supported for the 5410
Switch configurations. 5430 Switch 60A PDU Engineering Power Guidelines
and 5430 Switch 60A PDU Engineering power rules list the LMs supported for
the 5430 Switch configurations.
Table 2-1
5410 Switch Engineering Power Guidelines
Line Modules Legacy Fan Trays, 5T-SM, Gen2 Fan 5T-SM, Gen2 Fan
SMs, and PDUs Trays, Legacy PDUs Trays, and Gen2 PDUs
(3x80A)
Pre-4.0 LMs (<120G) Supported Supported Supported
OSLM-5-100G Supported Supported

OSLM-50-10G Grey optics only
OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e QPSK and 16QAM Supported

supported as listed in
5410 Switch 60A PDU
Engineering power rules
OSLM-5-WL3n Supported as listed in Supported

5410 Switch 60A PDU
Engineering power rules

Power 2-3
Table 2-2
5410 Switch 60A PDU Engineering power rules
PDU Feed Number of OSLM-5-WL3n Number of

or OSLM-2-WL3 (16QAM) other LMs
Feeds 1 and 3 1 2
Feeds 1 and 3 2 1
Feed 2 2 0
Table 2-3
5430 Switch 60A PDU Engineering Power Guidelines
Line Modules Legacy SMs, Fan 15T-SM, Gen2 15T-SM, Gen2 15T-SM, Gen2
Trays, PDUs Fan Trays, Fan, Gen2 PDUs Fan Trays, Gen2
Legacy PDUs 60A PDUs 70A
Pre-4.0 LMs (<120G) Supported Supported Supported Supported
OSLM-5-100G Supported Supported Supported

OSLM-50-10G Grey optics only
OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e QPSK supported Supported

all slots. 16QAM
supported as listed
in 5430 Switch 60A
PDU Engineering
power rules1
OSLM-5-WL3n Supported as Supported

listed in 5430
Switch 60A PDU
Engineering power
rules
Note 1: See “15Tb 5430 Switch w/Gen2 60A PDUs power specifications (typical)” in chapter 9 of System
Description (-100) for additional options.
Table 2-4

Feed 1 0 3
Feeds 2 - 7 2 2

2-4 Power
Table 2-4

Feeds 2 - 7 3 0
Feeds 2 - 7 1 3
Feed 8 0 3
Shock hazard from dual power sources

The 5400 Switch uses a dual -48 VDC power source (typically referred to as
A-side and B-side). Each source is protected by separate circuit breakers or
fuses in the Power Distribution Unit and by separate facility Battery
Distribution Fuse Bay (BDFB) circuit breakers. Because the 5400 Switch uses
this redundant -48 VDC dual connection power configuration and is designed
to operate fully from only one -48 VDC power source, removing power from
one source (either A-side or B-side circuit breakers or fuses) does not remove
power from the other source.
CAUTION
Risk of electric shock
Disconnect all power sources before servicing to avoid shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Risque de choc électrique
Débranchez toutes les sources d'alimentation avant l'entretien
afin d'éviter tout risque de choc.

Power 2-5
Procedure 2-1
Verifying 5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal
isolation
Use this procedure to verify the A/B return and -48V Terminal isolation.
ATTENTION
Perform this task if the installation practices at this site require verification of
A/B terminal isolation to be performed as part of commissioning.
Procedure
Step Action
Verify A/B return terminal isolation

1 At the front of the 5430 Switch, verify that no modules are fully inserted into
the backplane.
2 At the rear of the 5430 Switch, remove the two thumb-screws securing the A-
Side PDU and B-Side PDU terminal block protective covers and remove the
covers.
3 Remove all fuses from both A and B PDUs or open all circuit breakers on both
PDUs.
4 Turn on ohmmeter and select highest resistance range available.
5 Touch leads of the meter together to ensure that the meter is working
properly. Adjust meter if necessary. The meter should read zero ohms.
6 Verify the A return terminal isolation as follows:
ATTENTION
In the following steps, perform measurements for feeds 1 through 8 on 8-feed
PDUs or perform measurements for feeds 1 through 10 on 10-feed PDUs.
—continued—

2-6 Power
Procedure 2-1 (continued)

Verifying 5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolation
Step Action
a. Measure resistance between PDU-A feed 1 RTN and feed 2 RTN as

shown in 5430 Switch PDU-A -RTN terminal isolation (8-feed PDU
shown).
Note: This measurement is highly dependent on the meter being used.
Using a Fluke 87 or Fluke 189 in the auto range mode should get a
reading over 30k Ohm in less than 10 seconds. The delay is due to
capacitors charging. Other DMM such as the Fluke 179 must be set to
the maximum manual range (60 M ohm range for Fluke 179) to operate
reliably. There is no delay if using an analog meter (Simpson 260 or
equivalent).
b. Read ohmmeter display and note the value. The reading must indicate
greater than 30k Ohm. A resistance less than 30k Ohm indicates a
problem with the PDU and should be corrected.
Figure 2-1
5430 Switch PDU-A -RTN terminal isolation (8-feed PDU shown)
BL
AC
K
D
RE
5430-09026
c. Record the result in the 1 RTN row in Section D: A/B RTN terminal
isolation tests.
d. Repeat step a. through step c. for 1 RTN to 3 RTN, 4 RTN, 5 RTN, 6 RTN,
7 RTN, 8 RTN, 9 RTN, and 10 RTN and record results in the 1 RTN row.
e. Repeat step a. through step d. for 2 RTN to 3 RTN, 4 RTN, 5 RTN, 6 RTN,
7 RTN, and 8 RTN, 9 RTN, and 10 RTN and record results in the 2 RTN
row.

Power 2-7
f. Repeat step a. through step d. for 3 RTN to 4 RTN, 5 RTN, 6 RTN, 7 RTN,
and 8 RTN, 9 RTN, and 10 RTN and record results in the 3 RTN row.
—continued—

2-8 Power

Step Action
g. Repeat step a. through step d. for 4 RTN to 5 RTN, 6 RTN, 7 RTN, and 8
RTN, 9 RTN, and 10 RTN and record results in the 4 RTN row.
h. Repeat step a. through step d. for 5 RTN to 6 RTN, 7 RTN, and 8 RTN,
9 RTN, and 10 RTN and record results in the 5 RTN row.
i. Repeat step a. through step d. for 6 RTN to 7 RTN, 8 RTN, 9 RTN, and
10 RTN and record results in the 6 RTN row.
j. Repeat step a. through step d. for 7RTN to 8 RTN, 9 RTN, and 10 RTN
and record results in the 7 RTN row.
k. Repeat step a. through step d. for 8 RTN to 9 RTN and 10 RTN and
record results in the 8 RTN row.
l. Repeat step a. through step d. for 9RTN to 10 RTN and record results in
the 9 RTN row.
7 Repeat step 6 for PDU-B and record the results in Section D: A/B RTN
terminal isolation tests.
Verify A/B -48V terminal isolation
Note: Perform this task if the installation practices at this site require
verification of A/B terminal isolation to be performed as part of
commissioning.
8 Verify the A/B -48V terminal isolation as follows:
ATTENTION
In the following steps, perform the measurements for feeds 1 through 8 on 8-
feed PDUs or perform measurements for feeds 1 through 10 on 10-feed
PDUs.
a. Measure resistance between PDU-A feed 1 -48V and feed 2 -48V as

shown in 5430 Switch PDU-A -48V terminal isolation.
b. Read ohmmeter display and note the value. The reading must indicate a
high resistance value. A resistance less than 30k Ohm indicates a
problem with the PDU and must be corrected.
c. Record the result in the 1 -48V row in Section E: A/B -48V terminal
isolation tests.
—continued—

Power 2-9

Step Action
Figure 2-2
5430 Switch PDU-A -48V terminal isolation
BL
RE
AC
K
8
5430-09027
d. Repeat step a. through step c. for 1 -48V to 3 -48V, 4 -48V, 5 -48V, 6 -48V,
7 -48V, 8 -48V, 9 -48V, and 10-48V and record results in the 1 -48V row.
e. Repeat step a. through step d. for 2 -48V to 3 -48V, 4 -48V, 5 -48V, 6 -48V,
7 -48V, and 8 -48V, 9 -48V, and 10-48V and record results in the 2 -48V
row.
f. Repeat step a. through step d. for 3 -48V to 4 -48V, 5 -48V, 6 -48V, 7 -48V,
and 8 -48V, 9 -48V, and 10-48V and record results in the 3 -48V row.
g. Repeat step a. through step d. for 4 -48V to 5 -48V, 6 -48V, 7 -48V, and
8 -48V, 9 -48V, and 10-48V and record results in the 4 -48V row.
h. Repeat step a. through step d. for 5 -48V to 6 -48V, 7 -48V, and 8 -48V,
9 -48V, and 10-48V and record results in the 5 -48V row.
i. Repeat step a. through step d. for 6 -48V to 7 -48V, and 8 -48V, 9 -48V,
and 10-48V and record results in the 6 -48V row.
j. Repeat step a. through step d. for 7-48V to 8 -48V, 9 -48V, and 10 -48V
and record results in the 7 -48V row.
k. Repeat step a. through step d. for 8-48V to 9 -48V, and 10 -48V and
record results in the 8 -48V row.
l. Repeat step a. through step d. for 9 -48V to 10 -48V and record results in
the 9 -48V row.
9 Repeat step 8 for PDU-B and record the results in Section E: A/B -48V
—end—

2-10 Power
Procedure 2-2
Verifying 5430 Switch external load and return
voltages
These procedures verify that the 5430 Switch is properly cabled for external
power and that the PDU has the correct DC load and return voltages applied.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to PDU filter circuitry
The PDU contains filter circuitry that controls the end-rush
current when power is applied or removed. Allow 30 seconds
between power removal and re-application to the PDU to allow
the end-rush current circuitry to function properly.
Procedure
Preparing for testing
Before testing the system DC load and voltages, the following steps are
performed.
Step Action
1 Remove all circuit packs and fan assemblies.

2 At the BDFB, ensure that the circuit breakers supplying -48 VDC power to the
PDU are opened and tagged Out of Service.
PDUs.
4 Turn on the multimeter and select the setting used to measure VDC.
ATTENTION
The remainder of this task requires two people, one person at the site BDFB
to open and close circuit breakers, and the second person positioned at the
PDU to take voltage readings.
Testing voltages on a 5430 Switch

Perform this test procedure to test the pairs of power and return terminals
listed in table 2-1 for the 5430 Switch.
—continued—

Power 2-11

Verifying 5430 Switch external load and return voltages
Step Action
ATTENTION
Each time the test leads are connected, observe the following correct
polarity: Red (+) lead connected to the -48V terminal in each case and Black
(-) lead connected to the return terminal in each case. Red and Black leads
are used for (-48V) and (return terminal) respectively in North America.
5 Connect the multimeter red (+) lead to A1 and the black (-) lead A1R and
verify zero volts present.
6 Have facility personnel/second member of the team apply BDFB power to the
PDU A1 feed.
7 Verify -48V present and record the measured results in Section F: PDU-A and
PDU-B power verification.
8 Have facility personnel/second member of the team remove BDFB power
from the PDU A1 feed.
9 Repeat step 5 - step 8 to test all other terminals:
• 8-feed PDUs- (A2 - A8 and B1 - B8) and returns (A2R - A8R and B1R -
B8R)
• 10-feed PDUs - (A2 - A10 and B1 - B10) and returns (A2R - A10R and
B1R - B10R)
10 If node has been installed in an 8-feed PDU reduced power configuration,
verify the following:
a. Power leads are connected to A1, A3, A5 and A7
b. Bridging clips are connected to A2, A4, A6 and A8
c. Power leads are connected to B1, B3, B5 and B7
d. Bridging clips are connected to B2, B4, B6 and B8
11 If node has been installed in an 10-feed PDU reduced power configuration,
verify the following:
a. Power leads are connected to A1, A3, A5, A7 and A9
b. Bridging clips are connected to A2, A4, A6, A8 and A10
c. Power leads are connected to B1, B3, B5, B7, and B9
d. Bridging clips are connected to B2, B4, B6, B8, and B10
PDUs are in the ON position.
—continued—

2-12 Power

Step Action
Corrective actions - 5430 Switch
ATTENTION
Ensure that the BDFB breakers are OFF before starting any corrective
measures
ATTENTION
Ensure the PDU protective landing cover is securely in place after
completing power verification.
When testing external power and return leads, if the correct voltage or polarity
is not present, the user should perform any or all of the following corrective
actions in the order they are presented.
13 Ensure that the DC load (-48V) and return cable lugs attached to the PDU.
14 Ensure that PDU power and return cables terminated at the BDFB are
making solid connections.
15 If any cable lugs are not correctly attached to the PDU or return cables are
incorrectly terminated, refer to the Installation manual.
16 If power readings on PDU terminal read zero voltage, check BDFB
assignments and circuit breakers/fuses are in place and in the ON position.
17 If the power reading on PDU terminal still reads zero, contact the next level of
support.
—end—

Power 2-13
Procedure 2-3
Powering up the 5430 Switch
Use this procedure to power up the 5430 Switch.
PDU 5430 Switch power feed slot matrix lists the slots powered by each PDU
feed.
Table 2-5
PDU 5430 Switch power feed slot matrix
Feed A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
CTM slots A-CTM C-CTM
LM slots A1,A2, A4,A5, A8,A9, A12,A13, C1,C2, C5,C6, C9,C10, C13,C14,

A3 A6,A7 A10,A11 A14,A15 C3,C4 C7,C8 C11,C12 C15
SM slots B1,B2 B4 B6 B8 B3 B5 B7 B9
Fan tray CFUA-1 CFUA-3 CFUA-4 CFUA-5 CFUB-1 CFUB-2 CFUB-3 CFUB-4
assemblies CFUA-2 CFUB-5
(8-feed
PDUs only
Feed B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
CTM slots A-CTM C-CTM
LM slots A1,A2, A4,A5, A8,A9, A12,A13, C1,C2, C5,C6, C9,C10, C13,C14,

A3 A6,A7 A10,A11 A14,A15 C3,C4 C7,C8 C11,C12 C15
SM slots B1,B2 B4 B6 B8 B3 B5 B7 B9
Fan tray CFUA-1 CFUA-3 CFUA-4 CFUA-5 CFUB-1 CFUB-2 CFUB-3 CFUB-4
assemblies CFUA-2 CFUB-5
(8-feed
PDUs only
Procedure
Step Action
1 At the rear of the 5430 Switch, verify all fuses are removed (all circuit breakers
are open). 5430 8-feed power distribution unit shows the circuit breakers and
fuses on a 5430 Switch.
—continued—

2-14 Power

Step Action
Figure 2-3
5430 8-feed power distribution unit
PDU-A Fused Disconnect
PDU-A Circuit Breaker Disconnect 5430-09059
2 At the front of the 5430 Switch, check each slot backplane connector and
verify no bent pins are present. If backplane connector is suspected of having
damage, contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to fan assembly connector
When installing lower fan tray assemblies CFUB-1 through
CFUB-5, carefully align the fans to prevent connector damage
from protruding fan tray assembly ball studs.
3 Install all fan tray assemblies (5430 fan tray assemblies).

a. Carefully position the fan tray unit at the empty fan tray unit slot and
sliding the fan tray unit until it stops.
b. Close the fan tray unit handle and secure the fan tray unit by tightening
the thumb screw.
—continued—

Power 2-15

Step Action
Figure 2-4
5430 fan tray assemblies
—continued—

2-16 Power

Step Action
ATTENTION
On 8-feed PDUs, fan tray assemblies are powered by feeds 1 through 8 and
fans power up as each feed is powered. On 10-feed PDUs, fans are powered
by feeds 9 and 10 and fans power up when feed 9 or feed 10 is powered.
4 Install fuse A1 (close circuit breaker A1). On 8-feed PDUs, observe that CFU-
A-1 and CFU-A-2 fan shelf Fan Status LEDs are illuminated Red.
Note: Fan LEDs will flash Red & Green and then remain lit RED.
ATTENTION
The power feed slot matrix for CTMs, SMs, and LMs is the same for both the
8-feed PDU and for the 10-feed PDU. In the 10-feed PDU, fans are powered
by feeds 9 and 10.
5 Install remaining A feed fuses (close A feed circuit breakers) one at a time.
If Then
8-feed PDU Observe the corresponding CFU fan shelf Fan Status
LEDs are illuminated Red (PDU 5430 Switch power
feed slot matrix).
10-feed PDU Observe CFU fan shelf Fan Status LEDs are
illuminated Red when feed 9 or 10 is powered.
6 Repeat step 4 and step 5 for B feed.

7 Wait approximately two minutes for the system power to stabilize.
—end—
After the power and ground test procedures are completed and the system is
powered up, goto Hardware and software installation.

Power 2-17
Procedure 2-4
Verifying 5410 Switch A/B return and -48v terminal
isolation
Use this procedure to verify the A/B return and -48V Terminal isolation.
ATTENTION
Perform this task if the installation practices at this site require verification of
A/B terminal isolation to be performed as part of commissioning.
Procedure
Verify A/B return terminal isolation
1 At the front of the 5410 Switch fan section, disconnect and partially remove
all fan units as follows:
a. Loosen thumb-screw securing ejector lever to fan unit.
b. Raise the ejector lever to disengage the fan unit from the fan tray.
c. Pull the fan unit part way out of the fan tray (approximately 1 in. or 25
mm).
2 At the rear of the 5410 Switch, loosen the two screws securing the A-Side
PDU and B-Side PDU terminal block protective covers and remove the
covers.
3 If circuit breaker PDUs are installed, set all PDU-A and PDU-B circuit
breakers to ON.
4 Turn on ohmmeter and select highest resistance range available.
5 Touch leads of the meter together to ensure that the meter is working
properly. Adjust meter if necessary. The meter should read zero ohms.
6 Verify the A return terminal isolation as follows:
a. Measure resistance between PDU-A feed 1 RTN and feed 2 RTN as
shown in 5410 Switch PDU-A-RTN terminal isolation.
ATTENTION
This measurement is highly dependent on the meter being used. Using a
Fluke 87 or Fluke 189 in the auto range mode should get a reading over 10
M ohm in less than 60 seconds. The delay is due to capacitors charging.
Other DMM such as the Fluke 179 must be set to the maximum manual
range (60 M ohm range for Fluke 179) to operate reliably. There is no delay
if using an analog meter (Simpson 260 or equivalent).
greater than 10 mega-ohms. A resistance less than 10 mega-ohms
indicates a problem with the PDU and should be corrected.
—continued—

2-18 Power

Verifying 5410 Switch A/B return and -48v terminal isolation
Step Action
Figure 2-5
5410 Switch PDU-A-RTN terminal isolation
D
BL
RE A CK
5410-11017
c. Record the result in the 1 RTN row in Section D: A/B RTN terminal
isolation tests.
d. Repeat step a. through step c. for 1 RTN to 3 RTN and record results in
the 1 RTN row.
e. Repeat step a. through step d. for 2 RTN to 3 RTN and record results in
the 2 RTN row.
7 Repeat step 6 for PDU-B and record the results in Section D: A/B RTN
Verify A/B -48V terminal isolation
Note: Perform this task if the installation practices at this site require
verification of A/B terminal isolation to be performed as part of
commissioning.
8 Verify the A/B -48V terminal isolation as follows:
a. Measure resistance between PDU-A feed 1 -48V and feed 2 -48V as
shown in 5410 Switch PDU-A -48V terminal isolation.
—continued—

Power 2-19

Verifying 5410 Switch A/B return and -48v terminal isolation
Step Action
Figure 2-6
5410 Switch PDU-A -48V terminal isolation
D
BL
RE
A CK
5410-11018
infinity (open). A resistance less than infinity indicates a problem with the
PDU and must be corrected.
c. Record the result in the 1 -48V row in Section E: A/B -48V terminal
isolation tests.
d. Repeat step a. through step b. for 1 -48V to 3 -48V and record results in
the 1 -48V row.
e. Repeat step a. through step d. for 2 -48V to 3 -48V and record results in
the 2 -48V row.
9 Repeat step 8 for PDU-B and record the results in Section E: A/B -48V
—end—

2-20 Power
Procedure 2-5
Verifying 5410 Switch external load and return
voltages
This procedure verifies that the 5410 Switch is properly cabled for external
power and that the PDU has the correct DC load and return voltages applied.
Procedure
Step Action
Preparing for testing

Before testing the system DC load and voltages, the following steps are
performed.
1 Ensure all circuit packs and fan assemblies are removed.
PDU are opened and tagged Out of Service.
PDUs.
4 Turn on the multimeter and select the setting used to measure VDC.
Note: The remainder of this task requires two people, one person at the site
BDFB to open and close circuit breakers, and the second person positioned
at the PDU to take voltage readings.
Testing voltages on a 5410 Switch
Perform this test procedure to test the pairs of power and return terminals
listed below for the 5410 Switch.
Note: Each time the test leads are connected, observe the following correct
polarity: Red (+) lead connected to the -48V terminal in each case and Black
(-) lead connected to the return terminal in each case. Red and Black leads
are used for (-48V) and (return terminal) respectively in North America.
To test pair A1 and A1R at the PDU:
5 Connect the red (+) lead to A1 and the black (-) lead A1R.
6 Have facility personnel/second member of the team install the BDFB fuse for
the A1 circuit breaker.
7 Connect the multimeter to Terminal A1 and the common lead to Return A1R.
8 At the BDFB open A1 by removing the fuse.
—continued—

Power 2-21

Step Action
9 Repeat step 6 - step 8 to test all other terminals (A2 - A3 and B1 - B3) and
returns (A2R - A3R and B1R - B3R).
10 Record the measured in Installation data sheets.
PDU are in the ON position.
Red lead Black lead Reading
A1 A1R
A2 A2R
A3 A3R
B1 B1R
B2 B2R
B3 B3R
Corrective Actions - 5410 Switch

When testing external power and return leads, if the correct voltage or polarity
is not present, the user should perform any or all of the following corrective
actions in the order they are presented.
Note: Ensure that the BDFB breakers are OFF before starting any corrective
measures.
Note: Ensure the PDU protective landing cover is placed securely after
completion of power verification.
12 Ensure that the DC load (-48V) and return cable lugs attached to the PDU.
13 Ensure that PDU power and return cables terminated at the BDFB are
making solid connections.
14 If any cable lugs are not correctly attached to the PDU or return cables are
incorrectly terminated, refer to the Installation manual.
15 If power readings on PDU terminal read zero voltage, check BDFB
assignments and circuit breakers/fuses are in place and in the ON position.
16 If the power reading on PDU terminal still reads zero, contact the next level of
support.
—end—

2-22 Power
Procedure 2-6
To power up the 5410 Switch, the following steps are performed.
Procedure
Step Action
1 At the rear of the 5410 Switch, verify all fuses are removed (all circuit breakers
are open). 5410 Switch PDU configurations shows the circuit breakers and
fuses on a 5410 Switch.
Figure 2-7
5410 Switch PDU configurations
PDU-A Fused Disconnect PDU-A Circuit Breaker Disconnect

5410-11006
2 At the front of the 5410 Switch, check each slot backplane connector and
verify no bent pins are present. If backplane connector is suspected of having
damage, contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance.
3 Install all fan tray assemblies (5410 Switch assemblies).
a. Carefully position the fan tray unit at the empty fan tray unit slot and
sliding the fan tray unit until it stops.
b. Close the fan tray unit handle and secure the fan tray unit by tightening
the thumb screw.
—continued—

Power 2-23

Step Action
Figure 2-8
5410 Switch assemblies
CFU-1 CFU Shelf

CFU-4
A-CTM1
A-CTM2
A-1 A-10
A-5 A-6
A-SM1
A-SM2 Shelf A
A-SM3
A-SM4
PDU B
PDU Shelf
PDU A
IO Panel
5410-11003
4 Install fuse A1 (close circuit breaker A1) and observe that CFU-A-1 fan shelf
Fan Status LEDs are illuminated Red.
Note: Fan LEDs will flash Red & Green and then remain lit RED.
The following table lists the slots powered by the power feeds.
Feed A1 A2 A3
CTM slots A-CTM1, A-CTM2
LM slots LM-1 thru LM-4 LM-5, LM-6 LM-7 thru

LM-10
SM slots SM-3 SM-4, SM-1 SM-2
Fan tray CFUA-1 CFUA-2 and CFUA-4

assemblies CFUA-3
Feed B1 B2 B3
CTM slots A-CTM1, A-CTM2

2-24 Power
Feed A1 A2 A3
LM slots LM-1 thru LM-4 LM-5, LM-6 LM-7 thru LM-

10
SM slots SM-3 SM-4, SM-1 SM-2
Fan tray CFUA-1 CFUA-2 and CFUA-4

assemblies CFUA-3
5 Install remaining A feed fuses (close all circuit breaker) and observe the
corresponding CFU fan shelf Fan Status LEDs are illuminated Red.
6 Remove all A feed fuses A1 - A3, (open all A feed circuit breaker A1 - A3).
7 Repeat step 4 - step 6 for B feed.
8 Replace all A feed fuses (close all A feed circuit breakers).
9 Wait approximately two minutes for the system power to stabilize.
After the power and ground test procedures are completed and the system is
powered up, go to Hardware and software installation.
—end—

3-1
Hardware and software installation 3-
ATTENTION
Before beginning the Control and Timing Module (CTM) configuration
process, ensure that the appropriate CTM Configuration Parameters data
are available in Section G: CTM configuration parameters. This information
is required to proceed with this section.
ATTENTION
Ciena supplied default certificates are for demonstrations only. It is strongly
recommended that customers procure/generate and use certificates for
deployments.
This chapter provides procedures for installing switch modules (SMs), line
modules (LMs), LM blanks, installing and configuring CTMs, verifying the
installed system software version, and, if necessary, upgrading the primary
CTM software. In addition, instructions are provided for installing and
launching Node Manager Software, which is used to perform and monitor
testing of modules. This chapter contains the following:
• Installing modules
• Installing and configuring the primary CTM
• Verifying system software
• Upgrading the primary CTM software
• Transferring the primary CTM software
• Installing and configuring the secondary CTM
• Installing the Node Manager application
• Launching Node Manager
• Testing line module slot
Module LED Operation
All modules in the 5400 Switches have Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to
indicate module status. There are basic rules for the meanings of each color
(red, yellow, and green), as well as for the sequence pattern of LED lighting
during operation of the modules.

3-2 Hardware and software installation
The color rules are as follows:

• Basic red rule— A lit red LED indicates the module is not in a legal
operating state. A red LED is therefore lit during any boot, initial
configuration, or initialization state; in addition, a red LED lights when
there is a reset or module failure. If a yellow LED is present on the module,
it may supply additional information about the module.
• Basic yellow rule— A lit yellow LED indicates the module is in a
maintenance state, such as Admin Locked. The yellow LED may also
supply additional state information about a module when a red or green
LED is lit.
• Basic green rule— A lit green LED indicates the module is active.
The following terms are used in describing LED patterns.

• On— The LED lights steadily.
• Off— The LED is dark.
• Blinking— The LED cycles on and off in equal 250 ms time periods.
During operation, system modules all follow the basic module states pattern
described in Basic Module States Pattern. Modules that have local processors
with downloadable code (line module and control and timing module) follow
the module boot sequence pattern described in Module boot sequence
pattern.
Basic Module States Pattern

The basic module states pattern (Basic Module States Pattern) applies to
CTM and LM modules. Switch module LED states lists the SM LED states.
Table 3-1
FLT MNT ACT State

Red Yellow Green
Off Off Off Power is off.
Off Off On Module is operational and active.
Off On Off Module is in a maintenance state (for example, Admin Locked)

and is safe for removal.

Hardware and software installation 3-3
Table 3-1
FLT MNT ACT State

Red Yellow Green
On Blinking Off Run-time image diagnostics, configuration, or initialization is

taking place.
On Off Off Module is held in Reset state, or there is a hardware failure, or

software is not yet running from local flash memory.
On On On The module is in reset, either latch or other HW based, when

present, or that the processor kernel has not completed initial
POST stage.
Table 3-2
Switch module LED states
FLT MNT ACT State

Red Yellow Green
Off Off Off Power is off.
Off Off On SM is primary and operational.
Off Off Blinking SM is secondary and operational.
Off On Off SM is in maintenance mode (admin locked).
Off Blinking Off SM is initializing.
On Off Off Replaceable Unit Problem (RUP) - Module is

failed.
On On On Lamp Test.
Module boot sequence pattern

The module boot sequence pattern (Module boot sequence pattern) applies
to CTMs and LMs (modules with local processors that must be downloaded
and initialized before providing service). Modules go through the following
phases when booting: Power On Self Test (POST), POST complete, kernel/
maintenance stage, and application stage.

Table 3-3
Module boot sequence pattern
FLT MNT ACT State

Red Yellow Green
On On On The module is in reset, either ejector or other HW based, when

present, or that the processor kernel has not completed initial
POST stage.
Blink Blink Off Module is present, powered, processor core is not in latch or
external reset, and processor core has reached a defined state
of operations (i.e. POST complete), but not completed or
successfully achieved full Kernel operation. - Post Stage
Off Blink Off Module is present, indicates SW Kernel is fully operational but
application is not fully loaded (i.e. application initialization). The
MNT LED blinks in this state when coming up from a cold boot. -
Kernel/MNT Stage.
Off Blink Off Module is present, indicates SW Kernel is fully operational but
application is not fully loaded (i.e. application initialization). The
MNT LED blinks in this state when coming up from a warm boot.
- Kernel/MNT Stage
Off Off On Module is operational to a point where software considers it

"good" or "not failed" with expected applications (based on its
redundancy state) running without error. Indicates to other
modules that no major faults are present in the processing core,
and software application is operational and both module
software and hardware are error free. - Application Stage

Procedure 3-1
Installing modules
Prior to installing and powering SMs, this procedure partially installs LMs and
LM blanks in the customer ordered configuration. All LMs and LM blanks are
inserted into the final configuration slots however, do not engage the
backplane to maintain cooling during site commissioning.
ATTENTION
Prior to installing SMs, partially insert LMs and LM blanks into the 5400
Switch however, do not engage the backplane (fully insert) the modules.
Partially inserting modules maintains cooling during the site commissioning.
The 5410 Switch accommodates up to a maximum of four switch modules (PN

134-5420-901 for 1.2Tb or PN 134-5422-901 for 5Tb). The 5410 uses a 1:3
protected switch module configuration and are installed in bays under the
CTMs. (5410 and 5430 Switch system rack components (front doors
removed)).
The 5430 Switch accommodates up to a maximum of nine switch modules

(PN 134-5420-900 for 3.6Tb or PN 134-5422-900 for 15Tb). These SMs
occupy Shelf B slots B-1 through B-9 (5410 and 5430 Switch system rack
components (front doors removed)).
The number of supported SFPs/XFPs/CFPs per line module depends on the

number of primary SMs installed in the system and the type of LM. The term
supported refers to the number of SFPs/XFPs/CFPs per LM (counting from
the top port of each LM) that can allow the laser to be turned on and carry
traffic. The information in Switch module matrix for 1.2Tb 5410 Switch and
3.6Tb 5430 Switch and Switch module matrix for 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb
5430 Switch maps the number of primary SMs to the number of SFP/XFPs/
CFPs supported for each LM type in a 5400 Switch.

Figure 3-1
5410 and 5430 Switch system rack components (front doors removed)

Table 3-4
Switch module matrix for 1.2Tb 5410 Switch and 3.6Tb 5430 Switch
Number of Primary Switch Modules: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.2Tb 5410 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM-Flex 16 32 48 48
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM-12D, 4 8 12 12

MSLM-10G
Ports Supported on each xSLM-3 1 2 3 3 Not Applicable
Ports Supported on each xSLM-2 1 2 2 2
3.6Tb 5430 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM-Flex 4 12 16 24 32 36 44 48 48
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM-12D 1 3 4 6 8 9 11 12 12
Ports Supported on each xSLM-3 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
Ports Supported on v xSLM-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Table 3-5
Switch module matrix for 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb 5430 Switch
5Tb 5410 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM-Flex 16 32 48 48
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM-12D, 4 8 12 12

MSLM-10G

Not Applicable
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 (2xOTU4) 1 2 2 2
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 (with 0 1 2 2

16QAM) (2xOTUC2)

Table 3-5
Ports supported on each OSLM-50-10G 16 33 50 50
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-100G 1 3 5 5 Not Applicable
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-WL3n 1 3 5 5
15Tb 5430 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM-Flex 4 12 16 24 32 36 44 48 48
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM-12D 1 3 4 6 8 9 11 12 12
Ports supported on each OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

(2xOTU4)
Ports supported on each OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e (with 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2

16QAM) (2xOTUC2)
Ports supported on each OSLM-50-10G 6 12 18 25 31 37 44 50 50
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-WL3n 0 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs and backplanes
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling
equipment or making connections to the equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
When installing a module, ensure that the module part number and revision
level are in accordance with the shipping document.
ATTENTION
All module to be installed in accordance with the Site Survey Document.

ATTENTION
Before installing the SM, review the module-handling procedures in Proper
module handling.
ATTENTION
Proper cooling must be maintained. Prior to installing SMs, partially insert
LMs and LM blanks into the 5400 Switch however, do not engage the
backplane (fully insert) the modules. Partially inserting modules maintains
cooling during the site commissioning.
Procedure
Step Action
Partially insert LMs and LM blanks
CAUTION
Danger of LM failure
Insert LMs partially, as instructed by this procedure. Do not
insert LMs fully. If a LM is inserted fully at this time--prior to
the installation of the CTM--the LM will fail and will need to be
returned to Ciena as instructed in the Ciena return material
authorization (RMA) procedure.
1 At the front of the 5400 Switch, partially install LMs and LM blanks in the final
deliverable configuration:
a. Remove the blank filler panel (if applicable) from the slot into which the
LM or LM blank is to be installed.
b. Inspect the backplane connector for that slot and verify that no connector
pins are bent. If the 5400 Switch is suspected of having damage, contact
Ciena Technical Support for assistance.
c. If an LM is to be installed in the slot, remove the LM from its ESD-guard
anti-static bag.
Note: The shelves in the 5400 Switches include fiber management
guides that are color-coded black and gray to match the ejectors of the
LMs and CTMs. As modules are installed, ensure they are oriented so
that the color of the module ejectors matches the adjacent fiber
management guide.
d. Using a flashlight inspect the LM or LM blank connector block for damage
or misalignment. If damage to the connector block is suspected, return
the module to Ciena.
e. Open the ejector levers on the LM or LM blank.
—continued—


Installing modules
Step Action
f. Insert the module into the appropriate shelf slot by slowly sliding the
module into the slot until the ejector levers start to engage in the ejector
bracket and begin to rotate.
g. Pull the module out slightly to ensure that the module is not engaged in
the backplane.
Install SMs
2 Remove the blank filler panel (if applicable) from the slot into which the SM is
to be installed.
3 Remove the SM from the ESD-guard anti-static bag.
4 Inspect the module connector block for damage or misalignment. If damage
to the connector block is suspected, return the module to Ciena following the
instructions in Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure.
5 Push the red buttons and open the ejector levers on the SMs.
6 Insert the SM into the guide rails and push on the faceplate, being careful to
use a level, straight-forward motion.
7 Slowly slide the SM fully into the slot until the ejector levers engage in the
ejector bracket.
8 Apply equal pressure to both ejectors (Switch module ejector handles (5430
Switch SM shown)) and simultaneously push them to the closed position
(parallel to the faceplate) to seat the module connector.
9 The SM yellow MNT LED blinks.
Note 1: On any installed SM, the yellow MNT LED continues to blink until the
first line module has been installed.
Note 2: In Node Manager, on the Switch Module View - Basic tab, values
are not displayed in the Role and Procedural Status fields until the first line
module has been installed. For information on the Switch Module View -
Basic tab, see 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning - Provisioning
and Operating (-310).
10 Repeat step 2 - step 8 to install all other SMs.
ATTENTION
IF SM FLT LEDs illuminate red, verify LMs and LM blanks are installed to
maintain cooling.
—continued—


Installing modules
Step Action
Figure 3-2
Switch module ejector handles (5430 Switch SM shown)
—end—

Procedure 3-2
Installing and configuring the primary CTM
A 5400 Switch contains two CTMs, a primary CTM and a secondary
(redundant) CTM. These modules are the central system controllers for the
5400 Switch system. Use this procedure to install and configure the Primary
CTM.
For the 5430 Switch the primary CTM can occupy either CTM slot A-CTM or
C-CTM as shown in 5410 and 5430 Switch system rack components (front
doors removed), but it is typically installed in the following slot:
• 5430 Switch - Shelf A, Slot A-CTM (5430 CTM part # 134-5434-900)
For the 5410 Switch the primary CTM can occupy either CTM slot A-CTM1 or
A-CTM2 as shown in 5410 and 5430 Switch system rack components (front
doors removed), but it is typically installed in the following slot:
• 5410 Switch - Shelf A, Slot A-CTM1 (5410 CTM part # 134-0183-901)
For the purpose of this procedure, the primary CTM is installed in Shelf A (A-
CTM) for the 5430 Switch and in Shelf A (A-CTM1) for the 5410 Switch.
ATTENTION
15Tb 5430 Switch with 10-feed Gen2 PDUs can report power alarms if all
SMs are not installed.
After the primary CTM has been installed, it must be properly configured (for
example, IP addresses, netmasks, Node name, system time, date, and so
forth). The required configuration parameters are listed in Section G: CTM
configuration parameters.
CAUTION
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION

ATTENTION
Do not tighten faceplate screws until all modules are installed in the final
deliverable configuration in preparation for Performing the final system
stability test
Procedure
Step Action
1 From the site terminal or laptop computer, start a HyperTerminal session.

2 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Hyper
Terminal.
3 Assign a name for the hyper terminal session.
4 Select the Comm port (example: Com9) and set the following parameters:
• Bits per second to 19200 (For 5430 Switch)
• Databits to 8
• Parity to None
• Stop Bits to 1
• Flow control to None
ATTENTION
When initially configuring the 5410 CTM, the bit rate should be set to 9600
bps. After completing the initial setup and CTM reset (Step 16), the bit rate
changes to 19200 bps.
5 In HyperTerminal, enable Capture Text from the Transfer tab.

6 Assign a name for the captured text file.
7 Use a 9-pin DB9 cable to a 8-pin RJ-45 cable to connect the Comm port on
the site terminal or laptop to communicate with the CTM. The RJ45 cable
pinout described below:
DB9 RJ45 Pin
2 (RX) 6 (TX)
3 (TX) 5 (RX)
5 (GND) 4 (GND)
ATTENTION
USB to serial converter is required.
8 Remove the CTM from its ESD guard anti-static bag.

9 Using a flashlight inspect the module connector block for damage or

misalignment. If the connector block is suspected of having damage, return
the module to Ciena following the instructions in Ciena return material
10 Connect the appropriate serial cable to the CNSL console port on the front of
the CTM.
—continued—


Step Action
11 At the ejector handles on both sides of the circuit pack, gently press the red
ejector handle release button.
12 Slowly slide the CTM fully into the slot until the top and bottom ejectors
engage the ejector bracket. Be careful to insert the module using the guide
rails in a level, straight-ahead direction.
13 Apply equal pressure to both ejectors and simultaneously push them into the
closed position. Do not tighten the faceplate screws to secure the CTM at this
time.
14 Observe the LEDs on the CTM (5430 Switch CTM LEDs and connectors and
5410 Switch CTM LEDs and connectors). The red FLT LED and the MNT
LED flash, the MNT LED remains lit for 2 minutes and then the MNT LED
starts flashing.
Figure 3-3
5430 Switch CTM LEDs and connectors
Switch Summary
Status Indicators Expansion Ports
SM SUM CNSL LINK/ACT LINK/ACT LINK/ACT LINK/ACT

ACT ACT
CTM
MNT PRI MNT
FLT SEC FLT
ES1 ES2 ES3 ES4
5430-09087
CTM Module Status Indicators Console Port
Figure 3-4
5410 Switch CTM LEDs and connectors
Console Bay Status
Ports Indicators
DCN Expansion
Ports Ports Alarm Cut Off
DCN1 ES1
CONSOLE LINK/ACT LINK/ACT CTM
ES3
CRITICAL
LINK/ACT 134-0183-900
MAJOR
MINOR
PWR A
PWR B
ACO
MNT
ACT
SEC
FLT
PRI
DEBUG LINK/ACT LINK/ACT USB

DCN2 ES2
CTM Status
Indicators 5410-11012
15 At the hyperterminal prompt on the site terminal or laptop, verify that the CTM
bootup process has started. If the process has not started, press Enter.
—continued—


Step Action
16 Monitor the CTM boot up process. The CLI Logon prompt with the following
message is displayed in 2 minutes, as shown below:
NOTICE: A newly installed chassis has been detected.
Please log in to enter the commissioning CLI
and commit the settings to continue initialization.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Login:
Note: All entries to the CTM Command Line Interface (CLI) or CTM Config
menus are case-sensitive.
Note: The 5400 Switch is pre configured with user account: superuser
(default password is superuser1!)
Note: At the CTM menu, use "." to leave an entry unchanged and use "-" to
reset an entry back to the factory default.
17 At the CLI logon prompt type the User ID and Password. The CTM Config
menu is displayed.
18 At the CTM Config menu:
a. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set Node Name option, and then press Enter. Type the
Node Name and press Enter. (for example, txn145).
Note: The maximum Node Name is 20 alphanumeric characters. Only
alphanumeric characters and '-' are allowed.
b. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set Main Management IP address option, and then press
Enter. Type the Main Management IP address for the switch (for
example, 192.168.238.145).
c. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set Internal Network Base address option, and then press
Enter. Type the Internal Network Base address for the switch (for
example, 10.200. Use default if no data is provided).
d. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set Management IP address netmask option, and then
press Enter. Type the Management IP address netmask for the switch
(for example, 255.255.255.0).
e. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set Management IP gateway address option, and then
press Enter. Type the Management IP gateway address for the A-CTM
or A-CTM-1 (for example, 192.168.238.100).
—continued—


Step Action
f. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set CTM Main1 DCN IP address option, and then press
Enter. Type the CTM Main1 DCN IP address.
g. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set CTM Main2 DCN IP address option, and then press
Enter. Type the CTM Main2 DCN IP address.
h. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set OSRP Node Address option, and then press Enter.
ATTENTION
Setting an OSRP Node Address for the node is mandatory whether or not
OSRP is being used in the network. Assignment of a unique OSRP Node
Address for the node is recommended. Note that the system does not verify
that the OSRP Node Address entered at the prompt is unique in the
network.
Ciena control plane signaling (OSRP) is enabled on the NE by default.
Disabling OSRP signaling is accomplished in the Node Manager - NE
Defaults - Facility Defaults - TTPs.
At the Enter OSRP Node Address prompt, do one of the following:

— Type the full OSRP Node Address, then press Enter.
— Or, type the 4-digit OSRP Node Address as noted by #### in the
following, then press Enter:
45.00000001000100010001####.00000000ffff.00
i. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set DCN Mode option, and then press Enter.
Type the DCN mode. Available options are: 100full, 100half, 10full, 10half
or auto. (100 Mb Full Duplex mode (100full) is recommended.)
—continued—


Step Action
ATTENTION
Menu items with “[O]” are optional:
• [O] Set FTP server IP address
• [O] Set CTM Aux1 DCN IP address
• [O] Set CTM Aux2 DCN IP address
• [O] Set CORBA Server port number
• [O] Set TL1 Module Port Number
• [O] Set HTTP Port Number
• [O] Set OSIoDCC Enable
• [O] Set OSIoDCC ID
• [O] Set CHAP Authorization for OS Shell
• [O] Set Enhanced Security Profile
Refer to the Installation Design Package (IDP) DCN Mode information.
Changing the CORBA Server Port Number, TL1 Module Port Number, and
or HTTP Port Number is not generally recommended, doing so will impact
Node DCN communications.
j. Set any optional parameters as listed above.
ATTENTION
The 5430 Switch does not have time zone settings. For consistent time
reporting across the network, it is recommended that the 5430 Switch
system time be set to the company time zone.
19 Review and confirm the configuration settings as follows:

a. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Set System Date & Time option, and then press Enter. Set
the date and time and press Enter.
—continued—


Step Action
b. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Display current setting option, and then press Enter to
display the entered settings. Review the settings to ensure that they are
correct. If changes must be made, modify entries as needed using the
steps outlined previously.
c. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the menu, type the number
to select the Commit settings option, and then press Enter to commit
the above settings, and then type YES or Y. (not case sensitive).
20 Before performing any user action which would result in resetting the LM,
CTM, SM such as a direct user reset or operation associated with firmware
upgrade, wait thirty minutes after successful boot.
Note: At the CLI menu the following message is displayed to confirm the CTM
reboot confirmation:
====Updated Node Blocked State to : UNBLOCKED =====
50a04500000001000100010001162100000000ffff00.
21 Refer to Basic Module States Pattern for a description of these LED patterns.
Observe the following LEDs on the CTM:
• PRI LED is lit green
• ACT LED is lit green
• SM SUM LED is lit red
After approximately 30 minutes, verify the following:
• CTM red FLT LED is no longer lit.
• Fan LEDs are lit green.
• All SM MNT LEDs blink yellow.
22 At the first LM to install, open the ejector levers on the LM.
23 Push the line module fully into the shelf until the ejector levers engage in the
ejector bracket and begin to rotate.
24 Apply equal pressure to both ejectors and simultaneously push them to the
closed position (parallel to the faceplate) to seat the module connector.
ATTENTION
The LM MNT and FLT LEDs flash, MNT LED will remain lit for a minute and
then the MNT LED will start to flash.
LM initial firmware provisioning and establishing HD-SM links can take 45

minutes to complete at which point the green ACT LED illuminates.
—continued—


Step Action
25 Proceed to Verifying system software.

26 After approximately 30 minutes, verify that all active SM ACT LEDs light
green and secondary SM blinks green.
—end—
Continue the commissioning process with the next procedure, Verifying
system software.

Procedure 3-3
Verifying system software
Use this procedure to verify the system software.
System software for the 5400 Switch is loaded onto each CTM before
shipping. The purpose of the procedure in this section is to verify that the
system software loaded on the primary CTM meets customer requirements.
ATTENTION
Ensure that the hyperterminal session initiated during the installation of the
primary control and timing module is active and is still monitoring the primary
CTM. Start a new hyperterminal session as required.
Procedure
Step Action
1 When the hyperterminal prompt is displayed on the site terminal or laptop,

press Enter and the login prompt is displayed. Type the UserId and
Password. Use superuser and superuser1! as the user name and password
for this procedure. The Maintenance menu is displayed:
--------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- MAINTENANCE MENU ----
--------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 Display system configuration
---- 2 Display module status
---- 3 Upgrade or revert software release
---- 4 Backup database
---- 5 Restore database
---- 6 Perform system operations
---- 7 Modify system configuration
---- 10 Log off
--------------------------------------------------------
—continued—


Verifying the system software
Step Action
2 Read the displayed Current Software Release number (for example,

(rel_cn5410_4.0.0.0_cl654864) and record the results in Section K: Software
version.
If the version number of the CTM software matches customer requirements,
disconnect the serial cable from the CNSL port on the CTM. Continue the
commissioning process with Installing and configuring the secondary CTM.
If the version number of the CTM software does not match customer
requirements, Continue the commissioning process with on Upgrading the
primary CTM software. Contact Ciena Technical Support to obtain the
required software.
—end—

Procedure 3-4
Upgrading the primary CTM software
Upgrading the primary CTM software consists of the following tasks:
• Preparing the site terminal or laptop for software transfer
• Transferring the software
Preparing the site terminal or laptop for software transfer

System upgrade software for the 5400 Switch is downloaded to the primary
CTM through a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) application running on a site
terminal or laptop computer. The procedure in this section describes how to
copy system upgrade software files from a CD-ROM to the FTP directory, and
how to install and configure the common FTP software package.
ATTENTION
This procedure is performed only if the Verifying system software procedure
determined that a software upgrade to the primary CTM is necessary. If a
software upgrade is not required, proceed to .
ATTENTION
Transfer files from the CD to FTP server home directory.
To copy system upgrade files to the site terminal or laptop and to install and
configure the FTP server software, the following steps are performed.
ATTENTION
If a site terminal is connected to the local DCN proceed to step 1. If a site
terminal is not connected to the local DCN proceed to step 15.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Insert the 5400 Switch DVD-ROM into the site terminal or laptop DVD-ROM
drive.
2 Double-click the My Computer icon on the Desktop.
3 Double-click the local hard drive icon (eg: C or D drive). This is the drive on
which the FTP directory is created.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Create the directory C:\FTPROOT.

If there is no C drive on the site terminal or laptop, create the directory
D:\FTPROOT.
5 Return to the My Computer root level and double-click the DVD-ROM drive
icon.
6 Copy the 5400 Switch system upgrade software files (.tgz) from the DVD-
ROM to the C:\FTPROOT (or D:\FTPROOT) directory or the appropriate
folder. The FTP application uses these files during the file transfer.
Note: If an FTP software package is already installed on the site terminal or
laptop by the site administrator, proceed to step 16.
7 Return to the My Computer root level and double-click the DVD-ROM drive
icon.
8 Double-click the FTP server icon and follow the installation instructions.
9 At the FTP server window, click the security tab and select user/rights.
10 Select New User and then type upgrade as the user name. Click OK.
11 Type upgrade as the New Password and as the Verify Password. Click OK.
12 Type the directory path name containing the system upgrade files
(D:\FTPROOT or C:\FTPROOT) in the Home Directory box. Click the
Restricted to Home block.
13 Click Rights and verify that Read, Write, and List are selected. Click Done
when completed.
14 Click Logging and verify that all check boxes are selected except Winsock
Calls. Click OK when completed.
15 Connect the Ethernet cable to the main DCN1 port and the other end to the
laptop.
16 If the site terminal is being used for the software transfer, obtain the site
terminal Internet Protocol (IP) address as follows:
a. Click Start. From the start menu, click Run.
b. Type command and click OK.
c. From the command window that is displayed, type ipconfig and press
Enter.
d. Write down the site terminal IP address that is displayed (for example,
10.5.55.39) and retain this information for later use.
—continued—


Step Action
17 If a laptop is being used for software transfer, change the IP address of the
laptop to a static address that is in the same subnet as the 5400 Switch Main
Management IP Address. To change the IP address:
a. Click Start. From the start menu, click Settings and then click Control
Panel.
b. Double click the Network Connections icon.
c. Right click the Local Area Connection for the laptop being used.
d. Click the General tab and select TCP/IP Protocol and click Properties.
e. From the TCP/IP Properties window, select Use the following IP
address.
f. Type an IP address that is in the same network subnet as the Main
Management IP Address of the 5400 Switch, (for example, if the 5400
Switch Main Management IP Address is 192.168.238.145, type an IP
address such as 192.168.238.142).
g. Type the Subnet Mask (for example, 255.255.255.0) and Default
Gateway (for example, 192.168.238.1). Obtain any additional Subnet
Mask and Gateway information from the site network administrator.
h. Click OK and the laptop may restart.
Continue the commissioning process with the next section, Transferring the
primary CTM software.
—end—

Procedure 3-5
Transferring the primary CTM software
Use this procedrure to upgrade the primary CTM with a new software image
(load).
System upgrade software for the 5400 Switch is downloaded to the primary
CTM through a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) application running on the site
terminal or a laptop computer.
CAUTION
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
For the purpose of this procedure, the primary CTM is the Shelf A CTM. It is
this primary CTM that is upgraded with a new software image (load) during
this procedure.
ATTENTION
If a laptop computer is used for software transfer, using a Ethernet 10BaseT
RJ-45 straight or crossover cable (both cables will work) to the same I/O
module connectors listed above.
ATTENTION
Ensure that the hyperterminal session initiated to configure the primary CTM
is active and is still monitoring the primary CTM. Start a new HyperTerminal
session as required.
Procedure
Step Action
1 When the hyperterminal prompt is displayed on the site terminal or laptop,

press Enter and type the UserId and Password.
The Maintenance menu is displayed.
Note: The 5400 Switch is pre configured with user account: superuser
(default password is superuser1!)
—continued—


Step Action
2 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Maintenance menu, type
the number to select the Upgrade or revert software release option, and
then press Enter to select the Software Release menu.
The Software Release menu is displayed:
-------------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- SOFTWARE RELEASE MENU ----
-------------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 List available software releases
---- 2 List release running on modules
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 3 Download a new release
---- 4 Delete an existing release
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 5 Upgrade to new software release
---- 6 Revert to old software release
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 7 Display Software Release Signing Certificate
---- 8 Return to main menu
-------------------------------------------------------------
1-CTM1:P> (rel_cn5410_4.0.0.0_cl654864, CN5430-245)
Enter Choice (? for help): ?
3 At the Software Release menu:

a. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Release
menu, type the number to select the List available software releases
option, and then press Enter to display the software releases available
on the node. A list of software loads currently available on the node is
displayed:
RELEASE STATUS
rel_cn5410_4.0.0.0_cl654864 good in-use
b. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Release
menu, type the number to select the Download a new release option,
and then press Enter to download a new software release. The Software
Download menu is displayed:
—continued—


Step Action
---------------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU ----
---------------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 List available software releases
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 2 Enter URL for software release file transfer - direct entry
---- - - - - - - - - - - or - - - - - - - - - -
---- 3 Enter URL for software release file transfer - guided entry
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 4 Enter user name for file server access
---- 5 Enter password for file server access
---- 6 List directories and releases on the file server
---- 7 Transfer software release from the file server
---- 8 Return to previous menu
----------------------------------------------------------------
Enter Choice (? for help):
c. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Download

menu, type the number to select the Enter URL for software release file
entry - guided entry option, and then press Enter. The following
message is displayed:
Enter '.' at any prompt to cancel and return to previous menu.
Enter '-' at prompt to clear the optional values.
Enter '?' at any prompt for help.
Enter the transfer protocol [tftp, ftp, sftp, https]
d. Enter the transfer protocol (example: ftp).

(ftp)
> sftp
e. Enter the IP address of the file server with the software upgrade file with
the extension .tgz and press Enter. (example: 192.168.18.225)
Enter the server IPv4 address
(0.0.0.0)
> 192.168.18.225
f. If necessary, enter the file server port number. If no port needs to be
specified, press Enter to bypass this entry.
Optional: enter the server ftp port number
()
>
—continued—


Step Action
g. If the software upgrade file with extension .tgz resides in the root directory
of the ftp server, this entry maybe bypassed by pressing Enter.
Optional: enter the path to the file. Separate
directory names with a '/'.
Start with '/' to specify an absolute path.
Do not start with '/' to specify a relative path.
()
>
h. Enter the software file name to be upgraded to with extension .tgz
(example: rel_cn5430_4.0.0.0_cl654865.tgz)
Optional: enter the filename. It must have a ".tgz"
extension.
()
> rel_cn5430_4.0.0.0_cl654865.tgz
The Software Download menu is displayed
i. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Download
menu, type the number to select the Enter user name for file server
access option, and then press Enter. The following message is
displayed:
Enter username:
Type the username and press Enter or press Enter to use the default
anonymous username.
The Software Download menu is displayed:
j. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Download
menu, type the number to select the Enter password for file server
access option and then press Enter. The following message is displayed:
Enter password:
Type the password and press Enter or press Enter to use the default blank
password.
The Software Download menu is displayed.
—continued—


Step Action
k. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Download

menu, type the number to select the List directories and releases on
the file server option, and then press Enter. The following (typical)
message is displayed:
Archives and directories of 'sftp://135.189.206.100/':
drwxr-xr-x 1 ftp ftp 0 Feb 02 09:33 5430 load
-rw-r--r-- 1 ftp ftp 525819045 Jan 31 10:22
rel_cn5430_4.0.0.0_cl654865.tgz
SUCCESS.
The Software Download menu is displayed:
l. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Download

menu, type the number to select the Transfer software releases from
the file server option, and then press Enter to transfer the software load
that was specified in step h. above.
ATTENTION
The transfer and unpacking process will take up to 15 minutes. The Software
Download menu is displayed when the unpacking is complete.
m. If the session times out, re login using the default UserId and Password
(superuser, superuser1!)
The Maintenance menu is displayed.
4 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Maintenance menu, type
the number to select the Upgrade or revert software release option, and
then press Enter to select the Software Release menu.
The Software Release menu is displayed.
5 At the Software Release menu:

a. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Software Release
menu, type the number to select the List available software releases
option, and then press Enter to display the software releases available
on the node. A list of software loads currently available on the node is
displayed:
RELEASE STATUS
rel_cn5410_4.0.0.0_cl654865 good
—continued—


Step Action
Note: If a syncing indication appears next to the software release

downloaded in step l., wait for up to 10 minutes for this syncing indication to
disappear. Continue to type 5 and press Enter until the “syncing” message
disappears and the indication is displayed as follows:
RELEASE STATUS
rel_cn5410_4.0.0.0_cl654865 good
menu, type the number to select the Upgrade to new software release
option, and then press Enter to display a list of available software
releases for upgrade.
c. Enter the name of the software release to upgrade to and press Enter. A
confirmation will appear. To continue with the upgrade, type in yes and
press Enter. The software upgrade will begin.
6 Before performing any user action which would result in resetting the LM,
CTM, SM such as a direct user reset or operation associated with firmware
upgrade, wait ten minutes after successful system upgrade. Resetting a
module within this window can result in software roll-back to the previous
release. Continue with the next step to verify software upgrade is complete
and the CTM is stabilized.
7 Observe the LEDs on the CTM. Refer to Basic Module States Pattern for a
description of these LED patterns. Observe the following LEDs on the CTM:
• PRI LED indicates green
• ACT LED indicates green
• SM SUM LED indicates green
8 If the red FLT LED remains lit, re-seat the CTM. If the red FLT LED still
remains lit contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance. Refer to
Contacting Ciena on the copyright page of this document for contact
information
If the red FLT LED goes out, proceed to step 10.
9 If desired, old versions can be deleted. Do this from the Ciena 5400
Maintenance menu.
a. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Maintenance menu,
type the number to select the Upgrade or revert software release
option, and then press Enter to display the Software Release menu.
—continued—


Step Action

menu, type the number to select the Delete an existing release option,
and then press Enter.
The system displays a list of software releases available.
c. Type the name of software release to be deleted and press Enter. The
software release will be deleted from the CTM. The Software Release
menu is displayed when complete.
10 Disconnect the serial cable from the CNSL port on the primary CTM and save
the HyperTerminal configuration file.
Continue the commissioning process with the next section, Installing and
configuring the secondary CTM.
—end—

Procedure 3-6
Installing and configuring the secondary CTM
Use this procedure to install the secondary CTM.
On the 5430 Switch the secondary CTM can occupy either Shelf A, slot A-
CTM or shelf C, slot C-CTM.
On the 5410 Switch the secondary CTM can occupy either A-CTM1 or A-
CTM2.
For the purpose of this procedure the secondary CTM is installed in shelf C
(5410 and 5430 Switch system rack components (front doors removed)) of the
5430 Switch.
CAUTION
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
level are correct.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Start a new hyperterminal session.

2 Install the secondary CTM as follows:
a. Remove the blank filler panel (if applicable) from the slot into which the
CTM is to be installed.
b. Inspect the backplane connector for that slot and verify that no connector
pins are bent. If the 5400 Switch is suspected of having damage, contact
Ciena Technical Support for assistance.
c. Remove the CTM from its ESD-guard anti-static bag.
—continued—


Step Action.
ATTENTION
The shelves in the 5400 Switches contain fiber management guides that are
color-coded black and gray to match the ejectors of the Line Modules and
Control and Timing Modules. When installing modules, ensure the modules
are oriented so that the color of their ejectors matches the adjacent fiber
management guides.
d. Inspect the module connector block for damage or misalignment. If the

connector block is suspected of having damage, return the module to
Ciena following the instructions in Ciena return material authorization
(RMA) procedure.
e. Connect the serial cable to the CNSL port on the secondary CTM.
f. Push both red buttons on the CTM ejector handles and release the top
and bottom ejectors.
g. Slowly slide the CTM fully into the slot until the top and bottom ejectors
engage the ejector bracket. Be careful to insert the module using the
guide rails in a level, straight-ahead direction.
h. Apply equal pressure to both ejectors and simultaneously push them into
the closed position. Do not tighten the screws to secure the CTM at this
time.
i. Observe the LEDs on the CTM. The red FLT and MNT LEDs flash and
then the MNT LED remains lit.
3 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Hyper
Terminal
4 Assign a name for the hyper terminal session.
5 Select the Comm port (example; Com9) and set the following parameters:
• Bits per second to 19200
• Data bits to 8
• Parity to None
• Stop Bits to 1
• Flow control to None
6 In HyperTerminal, enable Capture Text from the Transfer tab
7 Assign a name to the captured text file.
After insertion, the secondary CTM begins to synchronize with the previously
installed primary CTM.
Wait approximately 30 minutes for the CTM to stabilize.
—continued—


Step Action
The following console window is displayed to confirm the CTM has stabilized:
PsActor: DoneSyncingWithPrimary:
#07/15/2015 10:26:26 Ps2 secondary publishing
availability=1
07/15/2015 10:26:26 Ps2 secondary is now available.
8 Observe the following LEDs on the CTM-C:
• SEC LED indicates green
9 If the red FLT LED remains lit, re-seat the CTM-C. If the red FLT LED still
remains lit contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance. Refer to
Contacting Ciena on the copyright page of this document for contact
information.
10 Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
Continue the commissioning process with the next section, Installing the
Node Manager application.
—end—

Procedure 3-7
Installing the Node Manager application
Use this procedure to install the Node Manager application on a site terminal
or laptop computer.
The Node Manager application provides network administration (for example,

configuration, management, testing, and provisioning) of a single 5400
Switch.
ATTENTION
The software revision of the Node Management application must be
compatible with (match) the system software of the 5400 Switch that it
manages.
ATTENTION
To determine the software version of any previously installed Node Manager
application, locate the install folder (for example, Ciena/Node Manager
4.0.0) and read the version number(s) associated with the folder name.
ATTENTION
For example, to locate the install folder from the desktop of the site terminal
or laptop (running a Windows operating system) click Start > Programs >
Node Manager for 5400 Switch > (a list of previously installed Node
Manager files is displayed).
ATTENTION
If a version of Node Manager matching the 5400 Switch system software is
already installed, proceed to Launching Node Manager.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Install Node Manager from the DVD-ROM disk as follows:

a. Insert the Node Manager DVD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive on the
terminal or laptop.
ATTENTION
If the CD-ROM is autostart-enabled, the Setup program is automatically
launched when the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
—continued—


Installing the Node Manager application
Step Action
b. Determine if the CD-ROM is autostart-enabled.

If the Setup program is automatically launched, follow the installation
Wizard instructions to install Node Manager. Proceed to Launching Node
Manager.
If the Setup program does not automatically launch, continue with step c.
c. Double-click the My Computer icon on the PC Desktop.
d. Double-click the DVD-ROM drive icon.
e. Double-click the Node Manager Setup icon and follow the installation
Wizard instructions.
Continue the commissioning process with the next section, Launching
Node Manager.
—end—

Procedure 3-8
Launching Node Manager
Use this procedure to launch the Node Manager.
ATTENTION
The 5400 Switch requires that a SM and a CTM be installed to complete the
boot process and support a Node Manager connection.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Before launching Node Manager, verify that the following conditions exist.
For a laptop computer connected to the switch, the connection is made
through a Ethernet cable connected to the active DCN port on the I/O module.
• Use straight cable to connect to CTM
• Use crossover cable to connect to DCN port on I/O module
ATTENTION
CTM-A corresponds to DCN1port and CTM-B corresponds to DCN2 port.
The IP address of the laptop or site terminal is on the same subnet as the
switch being accessed.
ATTENTION
Node Manager can run on various operating systems (for example, Windows
XP, or UNIX operating systems). For the purpose of the start-up procedure
described in this section, it is assumed that the application has been installed
on a platform using a Windows XP operating system.
2 At the Windows XP desktop, select Start > Programs > Node Manager for
5400 > Node Manager 4.1.0.x.
The Node Manager command window opens and is minimized. After the
connection is established, the Node Manager 3.0.0.x dialog box opens. The
Node Url and User Name fields may appear with default values (if required,
refer to the Node Manager Fundamentals (-195) for additional details).
3 At the Node Manager dialog box (Node Manager dialog box (typical)), select
the 5400 Switch by typing the node name or a valid IP address (5400 Switch
name: IP address format) in the Node Url field.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 3-5
Node Manager dialog box (typical)
4 In the User Name and Password fields, type the appropriate information.
(default username and password are administrator and admin1!)
ATTENTION
The User Name and Password are case sensitive.
5 Click OK.
If the logon was unsuccessful, troubleshooting must be performed to isolate
the network problem. Troubleshooting steps include:
a. Verifying that the information typed during step 3 and step 4 are accurate.
b. Verifying that the 5400 Switch and Node Manager are the same version
of software.
c. Performing a ping of the 5400 Switch to verify network connectivity.
ATTENTION
If all efforts to log on fail, contact Ciena Technical Support personnel. Refer
to Contacting Ciena on the copyright page of this document for contact
information.
—continued—


Step Action
ATTENTION
Before proceeding to the next procedure, ensure that the Timing source is
configured to operational standards and verify the system is alarm free.
Refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Alarm Clearing
(-543) for alarm and trouble clearing procedures.
ATTENTION
Continue the commissioning process with the next chapter, “System
operation tests” on page 4-1.
6 From Node Manager click Go > Monitoring > Alarms and Events and select
the Alarms tab and verify the system is alarm free.
7 From Node Manager click Go > Administration > Timing References >
Station Clock Input.
8 In the detail frame select BITS1.
9 Select SF from the Format drop down menu.
10 Select B8ZS for encoding.
11 Click Accept.
12 In the detail frame select BITS2.
13 Select SF from the Format drop down menu.
14 Select B8ZS for encoding.
15 Click Accept.
ATTENTION
If applicable, refer 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Administration and Security
(-301) for the appropriate certificate transfer procedure to transfer
certificates used for secure node communications.
—end—

Procedure 3-9
Testing line module slot
5400 Switches support the following types of line modules.
• eSLM-FLEX-100G line module The nineteen port Ethernet Services line
module with one 100G CFP module, six XFP modules, and twelve SFP/
SFP+ modules to support 100GbE, 10GbE (on XFP and SFP+), and
OTU2e (on XFP and SFP+).
• TSLM-1-WL3 line module w/100G coherent DWDM single port 100G
OTU4/ODU4 PT21 with flat mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj switching.
TSLM-1D-WL3 line module is available in five variants- Metro, Submarine,
Regional, Premium, and ENH PMD.
• TSLM-2-D line module w/40G coherent DWDM for use with two fixed port
40G C-Band Tunable Coherent DWDM CFPs.
• TSLM-3 line module for use with up to three 40G CFPs.
• TSLM-12 line module for use with up to 12 10G XFPs/10 GbE XFPs.
• TSLM-12-D w/ AM-XFP optics for MOR/MOR+ amplifier spans for use
with up to six AM-XFPs and six MSA compliant SFP+.
• TSLM-48 line module for use with up to 48 2.5G SFPs. 155/622M SFPs,
GbE SFPs.
• MSLM-40G-ULH line module for use with up to two fixed 40G C-Band
Tunable Coherent DWDM CFPs.
• MSLM-10G line module for use with up to 12 10G XFPs.
• MSLM-Flex line module for use with up to 48 2.5G SFPs, or 155/622M
SFPs.
• OSLM-1 line module single port 100G C Form Factor Pluggable (CFP)
module supporting OTU4/ODU4 with flat mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj
switching.
• OSLM-1-WL3 line module w/100G coherent DWDM single port 100G
OTU4/ODU4 PT21 with flat mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj switching.
• OSLM-1D-WL3 (single port) and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e (two port) line
modules w/100G coherent DWDM 100G OTU4/ODU4 PT21 with flat
mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj switching. OSLM-1D-WL3 line module is
available in five variants- Metro, Submarine, Regional, Premium, and ENH
PMD.
• OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e line module w/100G coherent DWDM dual port
100G OTU4/ODU4 PT21 with flat mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj switching
or 200G OTU2C with 2xODU4 with flat mapped ODUj; with ODU4 or ODUj

switching. OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e line module is available in five variants-

Standard, Premium, Enhanced, Basic, and Submarine. This LM is
supported on 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb 5430 Switch systems.
• OSLM-5-100G line module five port 100G C Form Factor Pluggable (CFP)
module supporting OTU4/ODU4 with flat mapped ODUj; ODUk or ODUj
switching. This LM is supported on 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb 5430
Switch systems.
• OSLM-5-WL3n line module provides a physical platform and electrical
interconnection for five line side 100G QPSK DWDM OTU4 Form Factor
Pluggable 2 (CFP2) modules. OSLM-5-WL3n provides up to 500Gb/s of
faceplate interface for aggregation into the TDM switching fabric. This LM
is supported on 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb 5430 Switch systems
• OSLM-12 line module for use with up to 12 10G XFPs/10 GbE XFPs.
• OSLM-48 line module for use with up to 48 2.5G SFPs, 155/622M SFPs,
GbE SFPs.
• OSLM-50-10G line module for use with up to 50 10G XFPs/10 GbE XFPs.
This LM is supported on 5Tb 5410 Switch and 15Tb 5430 Switch systems.
• SSLM-12 line module for use with up to 12 10G XFPs.
• SSLM-48 line module for use with up to 48 2.5G SFPs, or 155/622M SFPs.
The 5430 Switch accommodates a maximum of 30 LMs. These LMs occupy

Shelf A, Slots A-1 through A-15 and Shelf C Slots C-1 through C-15 (5410 and
5430 Switch system rack components (front doors removed)).
The 5410 Switch accommodates a maximum of 10 LMs. These LMs occupy

Shelf A, Slots A-1 through A-10.(5410 and 5430 Switch system rack
components (front doors removed)).
CAUTION
ESD procedures.
CAUTION
All modules must be fully seated and latched into the chassis.
If modules need to be removed and cannot be replaced with
another module, replace with the appropriate blank module.
Any module left incompletely seated (or partially removed) may

cause the system to become susceptible to Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) effects.

ATTENTION
Firmware Auto Upgrade is disabled by default.
All modules to be installed in accordance with the Site Survey Document.
Before installing the LM, review the module-handling procedures in Proper

module handling.
Do not tighten faceplate screws until all LMs and SMs are installed in the final
deliverable configuration in preparation for Performing the final system
stability test. Use a torque driver to tighten CTM, SM, and LM faceplate
screws to 3 inch-pounds (.34 newton-meters) of torque.
Procedure
Step Action
Ciena control plane signaling is enabled by default. If the network is not using Ciena control plane
signaling (OSRP), perform the following steps.
1 At the Node Manager session connected to the node, click Go > System
Administration > NE Defaults and select the TTPs tab.
2 Select the Sonet/SDH TTPs tab and disable STTP Route Signaling and
Embedded STTP Route Signaling.
3 Select the OUT TTPs tab and set Osrp Channel to None.
4 Select OSRP Defaults tab and set Channel Type to None.
To install an LM, perform the following steps.
5 Remove the blank filler panel (if applicable) from the slot into which the LM is
to be installed.
6 Inspect the backplane connector for that slot and verify that no connector pins
are bent. If the 5400 Switch is suspected of having damage, contact Ciena
Technical Support for assistance.
7 Remove the LM from its ESD-guard anti-static bag.
ATTENTION
The shelves in the 5400 Switches include fiber management guides that are
color-coded black and gray to match the ejectors of the LMs and CTMs. As
modules are installed, ensure they are oriented so that the color of the
module ejectors matches the adjacent fiber management guide.
—continued—


Testing line module slot
Step Action

misalignment. If damage to the connector block is suspected, return the
module to Ciena following the instructions in Ciena return material
9 Open the ejector levers on the LM.
10 Insert the line module into the appropriate shelf slot by slowly sliding the LM
fully into the slot until the ejector levers engage in the ejector bracket and
begin to rotate.
11 Apply equal pressure to both ejectors and simultaneously push them to the
closed position (parallel to the faceplate) to seat the module connector.
ATTENTION
The LM MNT and FLT LEDs flash, MNT LED will remain lit for a minute and
then the MNT LED will start to flash.
LM initial firmware provisioning can take 45 minutes to complete at which

point the green ACT LED illuminates.
ATTENTION
Active SM LEDs will be lit green. secondary SM flash green. If the red FLT
LED still remains lit, contact the next level of support for assistance.
12 If the MNT LED is not lit, install the LM into another backplane slot (if
available).
• If the red FLT LED goes out at the conclusion of initial firmware
provisioning and self-tests, the LM is good.
• If the red FLT LED remains lit, return the LM to Ciena. Refer to Ciena
return material authorization (RMA) procedure, for the procedure to
return the LM.
13 Test the original backplane slot by installing a second LM (if available). If the
red FLT LED goes out, the slot is good. If the red FLT LED remains lit, contact
Ciena Technical Support for assistance. Refer to Contacting Ciena on the
copyright page of this document for contact information.
ATTENTION
On initial LM install, this could take 20-45 minutes to allow node software
release to sync to LM. After sync, LM resets to bring up current software
release.
—end—

4-1
System operation tests 4-
This chapter provides the test procedures for determining that the 5400
Switch system components operate properly. The chapter includes the
following procedures:
• Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed
• Testing fan alarm and verifying node manager alarms
• Verifying Line Module Status from Node Manager
• Verifying SM Status from Node Manager
• Change line module port group mode
• Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED Status
• 100G line module traffic testing using 10G client traffic
• Performing Redundancy Checks
• Performing the final system stability test

4-2 System operation tests
Procedure 4-1
Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses
removed
Use this procedure to verify Power Feed LEDs with individual fuses removed.
Procedure
Step Action
1 From Node Manager click Go > Monitoring > Alarms and Events and verify
the alarm status indicates the system is alarm free.
Note: When removing fuses the LED panel alarm status may transition from
Minor to Major.
2 For PDU-A, remove fuse A1(open circuit breaker A1) and observe the
following LED status:
a. Power Feed LED 1 (Green to Red)
b. Power A LED (Green to Red)
c. MAJOR alarm LED (Red)
d. From Node Manager click Go > Monitoring > Alarms and Events and
verify the following Minor alarm is displayed:
• Input power fuse. Additional text indicates Input power fuse/breaker
associated with A1 is detected in an open/tripped state.
3 Replace fuse A1 (close circuit breaker A1) and verify the following LED
status:
a. Power Feed LED 1 (Red to Green)
b. Power A LED (Red to Green)
c. MAJOR alarm LED (Red LED is extinguished)
verify the Minor alarm has cleared.
4 Repeat step 1 - step 3 for all other fuses A2 - A8 (circuit breakers A2 - A8) in
PDU-A and note the LEDs and alarm details in Node Manager.
5 For PDU-B, remove fuse B1 (open circuit breaker B1) and observe the
following LED status:
a. Power Feed LED 1 (Green to Red)
b. Power B LED (Green to Red)
c. MAJOR alarm LED (Red)
—continued—

System operation tests 4-3

Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed
Step Action
verify the following Minor alarm is displayed:
• Input power fuse. Additional text indicates Input power fuse/breaker
associated with B1 is detected in an open/tripped state.
6 Replace fuse B1 (close circuit breaker B1) and verify the following LED
status:
a. Power Feed LED 1 (Red to Green)
b. Power B LED (Red to Green)
c. MAJOR alarm LED (Red LED is extinguished)
verify the Minor alarm has cleared.
7 Repeat step 5 and step 6 for all other fuses in PDU-B and note the LEDs and
alarm details in Node Manager.
8 Record the LED status in Section J: Power feed LED status.
On the 5430 Switch, when fuses are removed, if an alarm is generated for a
fuse that is not removed, check the power harness backplane connections
(5430 Switch Back Plane Fuses - (Top Section) and 5430 Switch Back Plane
Fuses - (Bottom Section)) for correct placement.
Figure 4-1
5430 Switch Back Plane Fuses - (Top Section)
—continued—


Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed
Figure 4-2
5430 Switch Back Plane Fuses - (Bottom Section)
—end—

Procedure 4-2
Testing fan alarm and verifying node manager alarms
Use this procedure to test fans and alarm generation.
The 5400 Switch fan tray assembly (Fan Tray Assembly) provides forced-air
convective cooling for thermal management of the 5400 Switch. The 5430
Switch has two fan tray shelves; each with five fan tray assemblies (5430
Switch Fan Tray Assemblies Locations); one above the upper line module
shelf (Shelf A) and one below the lower line module shelf (Shelf C). The upper
fan shelf draws air upward and the lower fan shelf draws air downward, with
both exhausting to the rear of the unit. Intake air for the fan tray assemblies is
drawn through and between the Switch Modules (SM) via faceplate
perforations (the intake filter overlays the front of the SM shelf). The five fan
tray assemblies operate independently from one another and are designed to
be individually hot-swappable.
The fan tray assemblies used in the 5410 Switch are the same as those used
in the 5430 Switch. The fan tray assembly (Fan Tray Assembly) provides
forced-air convective cooling for the 5410 Switch thermal management. The
5410 Switch has one fan tray shelf with five fan tray assemblies (5410 Switch
Fan Tray Assemblies Locations). The fan tray assembly is located above Shelf
A. The fan shelf draws air upward and exhausting to the rear of the unit. Intake
air for the fan tray assemblies is drawn through the air filter at the bottom, front
of the 5410 Switch chassis. The assemblies operate independently from one
another and are designed to be individually hot-swappable.
The CTM controls the operating speed of the fans, adjusting the fan
Revolutions per Minute (RPM) based on measured internal bay temperature
and a software algorithm. Temperature sensors at strategic locations on the
modules provide the majority of the data used to compute the necessary fan
RPM.
This task verifies correct redundant operation of the fans and provides a
simple way to verify alarm generation in Node Manager.
At the front of the system, the user can access the upper fan tray assemblies:
• For 5430 Switch - CFUA-1 through CFUA-5 and the lower fan tray
assemblies CFUB-1 through CFUB-5.
• For 5410 Switch CFUA-1 through CFUA-4

Figure 4-3
Fan Tray Assembly
Procedure
Step Action
1 Loosen the retaining screw securing fan tray assembly CFUA-1 in the fan
shelf, and pull the fan tray assembly partway out of the shelf.
2 Verify the following conditions:
• The remaining fans are still running.
• The remaining fans green LEDs remain lit.
• The MAJOR alarm indicator on the display panel is lit.
• In Node Manager, a major alarm (Replaceable Unit Missing) has been
generated for the removed fan tray assembly.
3 Slide the first fan tray assembly back into the fan shelf, until the unit is firmly
seated.
4 Finger tighten the retaining screw to secure the fan assembly to the fan shelf.
ATTENTION
The fan speed may momentarily increase.
5 Verify the following conditions:

• The reseated fan tray assembly begins to operate again.
—continued—


Step Action
• The green and red LEDs will flash and then the green LED will remain lit
• The MAJOR alarm indicator is extinguished.
6 From Node Manager click Go > Monitoring > Alarms and Events and verify
the alarm status indicates the system is alarm free.
7 Repeat step 1 - step 6 for all remaining fan assemblies.
8 Record the results on Section L: Fan alarm generation.
Figure 4-4
5430 Switch Fan Tray Assemblies Locations
CFUA-1 CFUA-5
CFUB-5
CFUB-1
5430-09072
—continued—


Figure 4-5
5410 Switch Fan Tray Assemblies Locations
Continue the commissioning process in the section titled Verifying Line

Module Status from Node Manager.
—end—

Procedure 4-3
Verifying Line Module Status from Node Manager
Use this procedure to verify the Line Module status from Node Manager.
Procedure
Step Action
1 From Node Manager, select Go > Inventory or click on the Inventory icon,
and expand the equipment tree to display the shelf containing the LMs.
Figure 4-6
Typical Line Module View - Basic Tab (5410 Switch shown)
—continued—


Verifying Line Module Status from Node Manager
Step Action
2 In the equipment tree select the LM and then click the Basic tab to verify the
following:
• LM CLEI and Board Part # information
• ARC State indicates Alarm Reporting.
• Operational State is Enabled.
• Availability Status indicates N/A.
• Alarm Status field is blank.
• Procedural Status indicates Providing Service.
• (eSLM only) L2 Availability Status is Available.
• Software and Hardware Revision.
3 If the above information is incorrectly displayed, then go to step 5.
4 If the above information is correctly displayed, then go to step 7.
5 From Node Manager, select the incorrectly displayed LM from the equipment
tree.
a. On the Inventory screen, select Prepare to Unseat Card and click
Accept.
b. Physically unseat the LM from its backplane connection. Note that the
and the Delete button appears at the bottom of the screen.
c. Click Delete button to remove the LM from Inventory.
d. Inspect LM and backplane connectors for damage.
e. Re-install the LM into the same backplane slot.
6 If the information is still incorrectly displayed, then install the LM into another
slot. If the issue remains then contact Ciena Technical Support for
assistance.
7 If the information is correctly displayed, then verify all other LM information
from Node Manager.
Continue the commissioning process from the next section.
—end—

Procedure 4-4
Verifying SM Status from Node Manager
Use this procedure to verify the SM status from Node Manager.
Procedure
Step Action
1 From Node Manager, select Go > Inventory or click on the Inventory icon,
and expand the equipment tree to display the shelf containing the SMs.
Figure 4-7
Typical Switch Module View - Basic Tab
—continued—


Step Action
2 In the equipment tree select the SM installed in slot 1 and then click the Basic
tab to verify the following:
• SM CLEI and Board Part # information
• Admin State is Unlocked.
• Procedural Status indicates Providing Service.
• Hardware Revision.
• Role indicates PRIMARY.
3 If the above information is incorrectly displayed, then proceed step 5.
4 If the above information is correctly displayed, then proceed step 8.
5 From Node Manager, select the incorrectly displayed SM from the equipment
tree.
a. On the Inventory screen, lock the SM and click Accept.
b. Select Prepare to Unseat Card and click Accept.
c. Physically unseat the SM from its backplane connection and click the
Delete button in Node Manager.
d. Inspect SM and backplane connectors for damage.
e. Re-install the SM into the same backplane slot.
6 If the information is still incorrectly displayed, then install the SM into another
slot. If the issue remains then contact Ciena Technical Support for
assistance.
7 If the information is correctly displayed, then proceed to step 8.
8 From the equipment tree select SM installed in slot 2 - 8 and verify the
information listed in step 2.
—continued—


Step Action
9 From the equipment tree select SM installed in slot 9 and verify the
information is displayed as follows:
• SM CLEI and Board Part # information
• Admin State is Unlocked.
• Procedural Status indicates Hot StandBy.
• Hardware Revision.
• Role indicates SECONDARY.
Continue the commissioning process in the section titled Installing SFP/XFP/

CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED Status.
—end—

Procedure 4-5
Change line module port group mode
Use this procedure to change a line module port group mode to support one
of the following interfaces:
• Optical Transport Unit (OTU) - When provisioned in this mode 100G ports
operate as OTU4 interfaces, 40G ports operate as OTU3 interfaces, and
10G ports operate as OTU2 interfaces.
• Transparent SONET/SDH - SONET/SDH ports accept the following: OC-
48/STM-16.
• CBR (Constant Bit Rate) - CBR ports accept the following: 2.5G CBR and
10G CBR.
• Ethernet - Ethernet ports accept the following: GbE, 10GbE, and 100GbE.
• Layer 2 Ethernet (eSLM only)- Layer 2 Ethernet ports on the eSLM accept
the following: 10GbE, and 100GbE.
Step Action
1 Using Node Manager select Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
2 In the equipment tree, select the line module and then select the port to change.
3 In the detail frame select Locked from the Admin Status drop down menu.
4 Click Accept.
5 Repeat step 19 - step 22 for all other ports on the line module to change.
6 Select Go > Inventory and from the equipment tree select the line module.
If Then
the line module is delete all provisioned objects and place the eSLM in
an eSLM HIR
otherwise step 7
7 From the Port Group Configuration tab select the Face Plate tab.
8 Select the Port Group Mode and FW Version for all ports to change then click
Accept.
9 Wait 5 minutes for firmware to be loaded and observe the port status indicates
Ready.
If Then
the line module is release the eSLM from HIR
an eSLM
otherwise End
—end—

Procedure 4-6
Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP
LED Status
Use this procedure to systematically populate the 5400 Switch with SFPs,
SFP+s, XFPs, CFPs, and CFP2s needed for the final system configuration,
and then building and testing the final configuration, module by module. The
test procedure uses Node Manager software, a test set, and fiber test jumpers
and adapters.
ATTENTION
The Ciena standard Statement of Work (SOW) for commissioning, is to test
modules and slots according to the ordered configuration by the customer.
Full chassis/slot (every slot) testing is not part of the standard SOW. Please
contact the Ciena account team for solutions and pricing details.
Before performing this procedure, visually inspect the 5400 Switch and verify
that no red alarm LEDs are lit. Alarms indications must be corrected in order
to effectively perform this test procedure.
The steps in this section provide a detailed procedure for testing system
reliability using Node Manager for provisioning a combination of cross
connects and diagnostic loopbacks. Other procedures or methods that
provide the same level of reliability verification may also be used.
level are correct.
Testing uses a combination of cross connects and jumpers to daisy-chain the

desired number of ports together while monitoring the test set to verify a
locked and clean Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) signal.
CAUTION
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
This test procedure uses one digital optical test set capable of generating a
single Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) signal, and is not designed to
simultaneously test a mixture of module speed (optical signal levels)
capabilities. The procedure must be repeated to install and test each type of
SFP/XFP/CFP.

Procedure
ATTENTION
The 5430 Switch with Gen1 PDUs do not support Tunable SFP+ or
10GBase-ZR SFP+ in the OSLM-50-10G. If either SFP+ is installed in a
5430 Switch with Gen1 PDUs then the SFP+ is failed and laser disabled.
Step Action
Preparing Ports for Testing

1 Remove all dust caps from the LM.
2 Remove the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs (SFPs/XFPs/CFPs (typical)) from the ESD-
guard anti static package.
Figure 4-8
SFPs/XFPs/CFPs (typical)
—continued—


Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED Status
Step Action
3 Slide all SFPs/XFPs/CFPs to be tested fully into the host LM slot.

4 Remove all dust caps from the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.
5 Verify the SFP/XFP/CFP LED status as follows:
• The ACT/FLT LED illuminates red and then amber. If the Admin State is
Unlocked then the red LED will remain lit.
6 From Node Manager expand the equipment tree to display the shelf
containing the LMs with SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.
7 Select the first LM then click Go > Configuring > Ptp and click the Basic tab
to verify the following:
• Admin State is locked.
• Control Status indicates Not Relevant
• Transmitter State is Off.
Figure 4-9
Physical TP screen - Basic tab
—continued—


Step Action
8 Repeat step 7 for all remaining SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.

Unlocking SFP/XFP/CFP
9 Unlock the XFP/SFP/CFP as follows:
a. From the Node Manager equipment tree, select the port (Physical
Termination Point - PTP) to be tested.
b. Select Go > Configuring > Ptp, select the Basic tab, and verify that the
Admin State in the Status field is locked.
c. From the Admin State drop-down menu select Unlocked and click
Accept.
d. Observe the LEDs on the XFP/SFP/CFP. Verify that the ACT LED goes
from amber to red, indicating that the XFP/SFP/CFP is in an unlocked
state. If the LED pattern indicates that an XFP/SFP/CFP is not unlocked,
repeat step a. - step c. for that XFP/SFP/CFP.
10 Repeat step 9 for all remaining SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.
Verify Output Power for the XFP/SFP/CFP
11 With the XFP/SFP/CFP unlocked, measure the output results on the optical
power test on that XFP/SFP/CFP. Verify that the results are within the
acceptable ranges listed in Optical specifications.
12 Record the output power on Section M: LM LED status and functional test.
If the output power of an XFP/SFP/CFP is not within the acceptable range,
clean the fiber connectors and bulkhead connectors and retest. If the output
power is still not within the acceptable range, return the XFP/SFP/CFP to
Ciena Corporation following the procedures in Ciena return material
Preparing the Digital Test Set
CAUTION
Never apply a signal to the input (receive) side of a port
if the strength of that signal exceeds the upper
threshold level of the optical receiver; damage to the
receiver results. Use a variable attenuator to test lower
threshold levels.
—continued—


Step Action
13 Measure the optical output power (dBm) of the digital test set using an optical
power meter, and compare the measured output power with the optical
receiver ranges in Optical specifications.
An optical attenuator must be used to lower the test set output (transmit)
signal if the strength of that signal exceeds the max optical receive power of
the XFP/SFP/CFP being tested.
14 Clean the digital optical test set leads and all test adapter cables (for example,
SC-to-LC, FC-to-LC, and so forth) in accordance with the appropriate
procedures in Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
ATTENTION
When testing OSLM line modules, the test set must be set to “Internal
Timing”.
15 Verify test set operation as follows:

a. Loop the test set.
b. Inject one error.
c. Verify that the error is returned.
d. Remove the loop.
16 Connect the test leads of the digital optical test set to the fiber test jumpers
attached to the XFP/SFP/CFP.
Testing Ports (OTN with SONET/SDH payload)

17 Connect jumpers as follows (Testing Ports (OTN with SONET/SDH payload,
xSLM-12 shown)):
• SFP+/XFP 1 TX port to the test set RX port.
• SFP+/XFP 1 Rx port to the test set TX port
• SFP+/XFP 2 TX port to SFP+/XFP 3 RX port.
• SFP+/XFP 2 RX port to SFP+/XFP 3 TX port.
.
.
.
• Last SFP+/XFP 12 TX port to last SFP+/XFP 12 RX port (physical
loopback).
—continued—


Figure 4-10
Testing Ports (OTN with SONET/SDH payload, xSLM-12 shown)
—continued—


Step Action
Creating Cross Connects

18 Create crossconnect between the following SFP+/XFP:
• SFP+/XFP 1 and SFP+/XFP 2
.
.
.
• Next to last SFP+/XFP 7 and last SFP+/XFP.
19 From Node Manager select Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic
tab.
20 From the equipment tree select the circuit pack and then select the first port.
21 In the detail frame select Locked from the Admin Status drop down menu.
22 Click Accept.
23 Repeat step 19 - step 22 for all other ports in the circuit pack.
24 Select Go > Inventory and from the equipment tree select the circuit pack.
25 From the Port Group tab select Port Group Configuration.
26 Select 1x10G CBR from the drop down menu for all 12 ports. (Default 1x10G
OTN)
27 Wait 5 minutes for firmware to be loaded and observe the port status to
indicate Ready (Typical Port Group Configuration Tab).
28 Unlock all ports locked in step 20 - step 23.
29 Select Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect
30 In the List frame, click New.
31 In the Details frame, enter a name for the cross connect in the Name field.
32 In the Details frame, enter a label for the cross connect in the Label field.
33 Select Use Existing End Points option button.
34 In the End Point A dialog box, click End Point ... and observe that the Select
Cross Connect From End Point dialog box opens.
35 Click OTN CTP tab (Typical OTN CTP Tab).
36 From the Available Selections list, select the CTP with the desired end point
and click Apply.
37 In the End Point Z dialog box, click End Point ... and observe that the Select
Cross Connect To End Point dialog box opens.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-11
Typical Port Group Configuration Tab
Figure 4-12
Typical OTN CTP Tab
—continued—


Step Action
38 Click the OTN CTP tab.

39 From the Available Selection list, select the CTP associated with the desired
end point and click Apply.
40 In the Cross Connects screen, click Accept.
41 The new cross connect is created and added to the end of the List frame and
true is displayed in the User Created column.
42 Repeat step 19 through step 41 to create a cross connect between the other
SFP+/XFP.
Physical Loopback
43 Connect the Rx jumper from XFP 12 to the TX port of XFP 12, creating a
physical loopback.
Note: When jumpers are connected to the SFP+/XFP, the LEDs will be lit
green.
Testing Ports
ATTENTION
Verify the max power limitations on the test set and the ports. Add
attenuators as required.
44 Configure the optical test set to generate a BER signal matching the OTN,
SONET or SDH environment with time slots mapped that equal the maximum
OC-n or STM-n rate supported by the XFP or port being tested.
45 Inject one error (B3) into the XFP and verify that it is returned.
46 Reset the optical test set error counter. Verify that the test set connected to
the port is locked and running an error-free BER test for a minimum of 5
minutes (actual duration may vary according to customer specifications).
47 Record the test results, in Installation data sheets.
If the BER test is not running error-free, perform any or all of the following
corrective actions in the order they are presented.
a. Verify that the jumpers are connected properly.
b. Verify that the test set is generating a BER signal properly configured for
the SONET or SDH environment and at the optical power signal level
supported by the XFP.
c. Verify that the fiber optic cables used for the BER test were properly
cleaned and are making solid contact with the test set and the optical
interface connectors on the XFP.
—continued—


Step Action
d. Contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance. Refer to Contacting

Ciena on the copyright page of this document for contact information.
Testing Ports (OTN with ODU2 payload)
48 Connect jumpers as follows (OTN with ODU2 payload Test Setup (Testing all
SFP+/XFP):
• SFP+/XFP 1 TX port to the test set RX port.
• SFP+/XFP 1 Rx port to the test set TX port
• SFP+/XFP 2 TX port to SFP+/XFP 3 RX port.
• SFP+/XFP 2 RX port to SFP+/XFP 3 TX port.
.
.
.
• Last SFP+/XFP 12 TX port to last SFP+/XFP 12 RX port (physical
loopback)
49 Create crossconnect between the following XFPs:
• XFP 1 and XFP 2
• XFP 3 and XFP 4
.
.
.
• XFP 11 and XFP 12
To create cross connects between XFP 1and XFP 2, the following steps are
performed.
50 From Node Manager select Go > Configuring > Trail TTPs > OTN TTPs >
OUT TTPs and click the Basic tab (Typical OTU TTPs Tab).
51 From the equipment tree select the desired port.
52 In the detail frame select NONE from the OSRP Channel drop down menu
(Default GCC0).
53 Click Apply.
54 Repeat step 50 - step 53 for all other ports in the circuit pack.
55 Select Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect
56 In the List frame, click New.
Creating Cross Connects
57 In the Details frame, enter a name for the cross connect in the Name field.
58 In the Details frame, enter a label for the cross connect in the Label field.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-13
OTN with ODU2 payload Test Setup (Testing all SFP+/XFP
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-14
Typical OTU TTPs Tab
59 In the End Point A section select Create New radio button and click
Supporting TP... and the Select End Point dialog box opens.
60 From the OTUTTP tab select the desired port and click Apply.
61 In the End Point Z section select Create New radio button and click
Supporting TP... and the Select End Point dialog box opens.
62 From the OTUTTP tab select the desired port and click Apply.
63 Click Accept.
64 The new cross connect is created and added to the end of the List frame and
true is displayed in the User Created column.
—continued—


Step Action
65 Repeat step 50 through step 64 to create a cross connect between the other
XFPs.
Physical Loopback
66 Connect the Rx jumper from XFP 12 to the TX port of XFP 12, creating a
physical loopback.
Testing Ports
Note: Verify the max power limitations on the test set and the ports. Add
attenuators as required.
67 Configure the optical test set to generate a BER signal matching the OTN
environment with time slots mapped that equal the maximum ODU2 rate
supported by the XFP or port being tested.
68 Inject one error (ODU) into the XFP and verify that it is returned.
the port is locked and running an error-free ODU test for a minimum of 5
minutes (actual duration may vary according to customer specifications).
70 Record the test results on Installation data sheets.
the OTN environment and at the optical power signal level supported by
the XFP.
—continued—


Step Action
Testing Remaining Line Module Slots
ATTENTION
The Ciena standard Statement of Work (SOW) for commissioning, is to test
All backplane traces will be tested by using either an OSLM-3, OSLM-12 or

OSLM-48 circuit packs.
71 Delete all cross connects and CTPs.

72 Remove the LM as follows:
a. Select Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
b. Lock the LM lasers on the SFP/XFP from the Admin State drop-down
menu.
c. In the Inventory screen, select Prepare to Unseat Card and click
Accept.
d. If required, loosen the retaining screws and use the ejector levers to
unseat the module. Pull the module out of the system slot.
73 Remove the blank module filler panel (if installed) from the slot to be tested.
74 Install the LM in the slot to be tested by sliding the LM fully into the slot and
place the ejectors in the closed position (parallel to the faceplate).
75 Using any or all processes starting in on Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and
Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED Status, configure necessary Physical
Termination Points (PTPs), Connection Termination Points (CTPs), cross
connects, and diagnostic loopbacks on the SFPs/XFPs in the LM slot being
tested.
76 Verify that the test set is locked and running an error-free Bit Error Rate (BER)
test for a minimum of 5 minutes. (The actual duration may vary according to
customer specifications.)
77 Record the test results on Installation data sheets.
78 Using Node Manager screens, perform the following actions in the order
presented:
a. At the Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect screen, select the cross
connect to be deleted and from press Delete.
b. Delete all CTP entries.
—continued—


Step Action
c. Lock all PTPs created for the LM that was tested.

79 Remove all fiber optic test jumpers (including test leads) for the LM. Remove
the LM from the tested slot.
80 In Node Manager, delete the removed LM from the system database.
ATTENTION
Each time an LM is removed from a spare slot after the slot testing is
completed, that LM must be deleted from the Node Manager database.
81 Re-install the blank module filler panel (if applicable) removed.

82 Repeat step 74 through step 81 for each LM slot until all unused slots have
been tested.
83 Re-install the LM in the original system slot from which it was removed.
CAUTION
Airflow advisory, high temperature damage, communications
degradation
Incorrect module installation may cause damage to the
backplane and module. Use proper installation practices.
5400 Switch modules require forced convection cooling. To

achieve efficient cooling, all covers must be in place, doors
properly closed, filler panels installed in unused slots, and
system fans operating. Open slots, doors, covers, or
inoperative fans may lead to overheating and degradation or
failure of electronic components.
Continue the commissioning process in the section titled Performing

Redundancy Checks.
—end—

Procedure 4-7
100G line module traffic testing using 10G client
traffic
This turn-up and test procedure explains how to bring-up 100G traffic on the
100G LMs in a 5400 node and to verify line module (LM) acceptance. This
procedure assumes that a 100G test set is available.
ATTENTION
It is necessary to test the OSLM-1 (CFP w/MPO connector) using OTN traffic
due to the hardware restrictions of the CFP (PN: NTTA03AA SR10 10x10
MMF) not supporting optical power monitoring.
Required tools
• (1) OSLM-1, OSLM-1D-WL3, OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e, OSLM-5-100G,
TSLM-1, TSLM-1D-WL3, line module
• (1) xLSM-12 or OSLM-50-10G line module with (10) SFP+/XFPs of same
type
• (9) Fiber loopbacks to daisy-chain xLSM-12 or OSLM-50-10G ports
• (1) Test set supporting up to 100G client traffic (Ethernet, OTN, SONET/
SDH)
• (1) LC or MTP/MPO fiber loopback for xLSM-1/1D port (if required)
• (1) LC single mode fiber to connect test set to 10G xLSM-12 or OSLM-50-
10G port
• Node manager client access to the 5400
Referenced documents
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement
(-545)
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Configuration - Provisioning and Operating
(-310)

Procedure
Step Action
Prior to these steps the xLSM-12 line module was tested and passed
acceptance testing using a minimum of 10 ports. The 10 ports are configured
for 10GbE (PG Mode: 1x10GbE under inventory – line module – port group
configuration). The same procedure can be followed using 10G OC192/STM-
64 client traffic on the TSLM-12 ports (PG Mode: 1x10G_CBR under inventory
– line module – port group configuration).
1 Ensure xSLM-1/xSLM1-WL3 is installed and alarm free. Review Node

Manager Inventory screen (xSLM1 Node Manager – Inventory – Line Module
Basic tab (typical)) to ensure the line module is properly recognized.
Figure 4-15
xSLM1 Node Manager – Inventory – Line Module Basic tab (typical)
—continued—


100G line module traffic testing using 10G client traffic
Step Action
2 Provision line module equipment and facility settings using default values.
Reference appropriate line module section below, step 3 - step 7 for xSLM-1
or OSLM-5-100G Equipment & Facility Provisioning, or step 8 - step 14 for
WL3/WL3e Equipment & Facility Provisioning.
xSLM-1/OSLM-5-100G Equipment & Facility Provisioning
3 With the LM to test installed and active, install the optical module (if required)
and ensure proper initialization and reporting on the Node Manager -
Inventory – Optical Module Basic tab (Inventory – Optical Module – Basic tab
(typical)).
Figure 4-16
Inventory – Optical Module – Basic tab (typical)
4 Using Node Manager, go to the Inventory entry for the LM to test and select
the Port Group Configuration tab from the detail pane and set the PG Mode
for Port Group 1 to 1x100G_OTN.
5 In Node Manager go to PTP Basic tab (Node Manager – PTP - Basic tab
(typical)) and Unlock the PTP to put the port In-Service and enable the laser.
6 Install fiber loopback cable on the port and verify no alarms.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-17
Node Manager – PTP - Basic tab (typical)
7 The LM to test equipment and facility provisioning is complete and ready for
testing.
WL3/WL3e LM Equipment & Facility Provisioning
ATTENTION
This procedure applies to all OSLM1-WL3, TSLM1-WL3, OSLM-2-Flex3-
WL3e line modules variants.
8 With WL3/WL3e line module installed and active, use Node Manager go to
the Inventory entry for the xSLM-1-WL3 or OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e and select
the Port Group Configuration tab from the detail pane and review the Mode
for Port Group 1, should be 1X100G_OTN_Mode1 for the WL3/WL3e line
module or 1X200G_OTN_Mode1 for OSLM-Flex3-WL3e 16QAM mode.
9 Go to Node Manager - Inventory – Port tab (xSLM1-WL3 Node Manager –
Inventory – Port – Basic tab)) Maintenance section and select Power On, then
under Status – Admin State select Unlock. Wait five minutes for Power On to
complete and PTP parameters are provisioned.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-18
xSLM1-WL3 Node Manager – Inventory – Port – Basic tab)
10 In Node Manager go to the WL3/WL3e PTP Basic tab Parameters section

and provision the desired Frequency-Wavelength. This will enable the
transmit laser, the Probable Cause status will reflect Tuning in Progress. This
will take approximately three minutes, prior to the status updating to reflect
Normal.
11 From the WL3/WL3e PTP screen select the Physical tab and set the Tx
Power to -11.00.
12 In the PTP Basic tab Status section Admin State change to Unlock to put the
port In-Service.
13 Install fiber loopback cable on port and verify no alarms.
14 The WL3/WL3e line module equipment and facility provisioning is complete
and ready for testing.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-19
TSLM1-WL3 Node Manager – Inventory – PTP Basic tab
xLSM-12/OSLM-50 Equipment & Facility Provisioning

15 Install nine fiber cables on xLSM-12/OSLM-50 ports in a daisy-chain
configuration as shown in Fiber Daisy-Chain (xLSM-12 shown), then Unlock
each of the ten PTPs. It’s expected that these ports will alarm with “Ethernet-
LOF” or “Ethernet-LFI” while no test traffic is present.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-20
Fiber Daisy-Chain (xLSM-12 shown)
—continued—


Step Action
16 Create the ODU4 ODU TTP using the OTU TTP auto created when the LM
PTP was installed.
a. From Node Manager, click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > OTN TTPs >
ODU TTPs then click New (Example showing data entered before
clicking on “Accept”).
b. Enter a Label, Example “Testing 100G OTN”.
c. Select Supporting TTP this is the OTU TTP for the xLSM-1/1D AID.
d. Select Tribslot Assignment (checked).
Note: When creating the first ODU4 TTP or CTP (Tributary Port 1) on the
OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e, use time slots 1-20 on the ODUC2TTP. When creating
the second ODU4 TTP or CTP (Tributary Port 2), use time slots 21-40.
e. Select Ex. Payload Type of PT21 (Expected Payload Type of ODU TTP).
f. Enter a Tributary Port identifier of 1.
g. Click on Accept (Example showing data entered after clicking on
“Accept”).

Figure 4-21
Example showing data entered before clicking on “Accept”
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-22
Example showing data entered after clicking on “Accept”
ATTENTION
No Tribslots are allocated under the “Tribslot Allocation” section.
17 Create ten cross connects (XCON) using the ODU2 ODU TTP (auto created
for 10GbE port) and the ODU4 ODU TTP (user created in Step 4). This step
is performed ten times.
a. From Node Manager click -> Go -> Provisioning -> Cross Connects
(XCON)
b. In the Cross Connects screen -> Click New (This set of steps is repeated
ten times)
c. Enter a Name, Example “100G_Test_10G-1” (#1 XCON), for the second
“100G_Test_10G-2” (#2 XCON), and continue to the tenth
“100G_Test_10G-10” (#10 XCON)
d. Enter a Label, Example “Testing 100G OTN 10G”
e. Select A EndPoint - use existing.
—continued—


Step Action
f. Select End Point “…” in the Select Source End Point window. Click
ODUCTP tab (Select source end points) and select the first 10GbE port
AID (Example: 1-A-1-1-2P1) and click Apply.
Figure 4-23
Select source end points
g. Select Z EndPoint – Create New.

h. Select Supporting TP “…” in the Select End Point window. click ODUTTP
tab (Select end points) and select the first 100G ODU4 port name
(Example: 1-A-8-1-4P1) and click Apply.
Figure 4-24
Select end points
—continued—


Step Action
i. For Time Slots Enter a range of 8 time slots for each of the ten cross
connects created as this step is repeated (Each ODU2 is 8xODU0)
j. #1 XCON use Time Slots 1-8 in the text field
k. #2 XCON use Time Slots 9-16
l. #3 XCON use Time Slots 17-24
m. #4 XCON use Time Slots 25-32
n. #5 XCON use Time Slots 33-40
o. #6 XCON use Time Slots 41-48
p. #7 XCON use Time Slots 49-56
q. #8 XCON use Time Slots 57-64
r. #9 XCON use Time Slots 65-72
s. #10 XCON use Time Slots 73-80
t. For Size select ODU2 from drop down menu (ODU2 x 1) and X 1
u. For Tributary Port enter a corresponding number; 1 for first Cross
Connect (#1 XCON), then 2 for second (#2 XCON), then 3 for third (#3
XCON), and continue till 10 for last (#10 XCON)
v. For Path Protection State leave default of Unprotected (XCON example
showing data entered before clicking “Accept”)
w. Click Accept (XCON example showing data entered after clicking
“Accept”).
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 4-25
XCON example showing data entered before clicking “Accept”
Figure 4-26
XCON example showing data entered after clicking “Accept”
—continued—


Step Action
18 Verify (Example showing ODU4 ODU TTP Tribslot Allocation – 80 “Both” (Bi-
Directional Tribslots)) all 80 Tribslots of the ODU4 ODU TTP are allocated.
• From NM -> Go -> Configuring -> Trail TPs -> OTN TTPs -> ODU TTPs
• Select the ODU4 ODU TTP from the list and review Tribslot Allocation
Figure 4-27
Example showing ODU4 ODU TTP Tribslot Allocation – 80 “Both” (Bi-
Directional Tribslots)
19 Configure Test Set port for the appropriate traffic type and start traffic to verify
traffic is running error free and leave soak for pre-determined time.
20 Check Node Manager – Current Alarms and verify there are no alarms on any
of the related equipment.
—end—

Procedure 4-8
Performing Redundancy Checks
After verifying that all ports and LMs are passing traffic without errors, the user
should perform redundancy checks on other system components, including
CTMs and SMs, and the battery circuit breakers on the PDU.
ATTENTION
Traffic must be provisioned on line modules prior to this procedure.
Procedure
Step Action
Testing CTM Redundancy

To test system response to loss of the primary CTM, the following steps are
performed.
1 Identify the primary CTM by the steadily lit green ACT LED and PRI LED.
2 From the Node Manager, select Go > Inventory, select the Basic tab.
3 Select CTM from the equipment tree and verify that the primary CTM
Procedural Status is Providing Service and verify that the secondary CTM
Procedural Status is Synchronized.
4 Partially remove the primary CTM as follows:
a. Loosen screws securing CTM and then push both Red Buttons on the
CTM ejector handles. Be careful to use equal pressure on both levers.
b. Release the top and bottom ejectors.
c. Slide the module straight out of the slot, taking care not to twist or tilt the
module in the guide rails.
5 When the primary CTM is removed, the Node Manager session will be logged
out and the user needs to re-login.
6 Verify that the test set has remained locked and error-free.
7 After five minutes observe the following LED status on the new active CTM:
• PRI LED indicates green
8 Re-install the CTM removed in step 4 as follows:
a. Slide the CTM fully into the slot.
b. Moving both ejectors at the same time, push the top and bottom ejectors
to their closed positions (parallel to the faceplate).
—continued—


Step Action
c. Tighten the screws to secure the CTM to the chassis.

Note: Allow 15 minutes for the CTM to initialize.
CAUTION
Ensure that both the top and bottom ejectors on the
CTM are pushed simultaneously to seat the CTM in the
backplane connector. If the ejectors are pushed at
different times, the resulting torque of the module can
cause damage to backplane pins.
9 Observe the LEDs on the CTM reinstalled in step 8. Verify that the green SEC
LED is lit, indicating that this CTM is now the secondary CTM. ACT LED is lit
green. SM SUM is lit green.
Note: Call Ciena Technical Support if the CTM does not assume the role of
secondary CTM.
10 Verify that the digital optical test set has remained locked and error-free.
11 Record results in the column labeled in Section N: Module LED status and
redundancy tests.
12 Repeat step 1 through step 11 for the other CTM (which assumed the role of
primary CTM during the test).
Note: If there is a spare CTM to be tested, the test procedure for the spare
CTM includes testing for CTM redundancy. Refer to Testing spare CTMs for
more information.
Testing SM Redundancy
Note: Verify that the system is Alarm free before continuing with this
procedure.
To test system response to loss of active SMs, the following steps are
performed:
13 Partially remove the SM as follows (start with slot 1):
a. If required, loosen the screws on the SM faceplate.
b. Release the top and bottom ejectors.
c. Pull the SM until it disengages from the backplane.
14 Verify the following:
• Major alarm LED on the display module
• Standby SM now displaying solid green LED indicating Primary Role.
—continued—


Step Action
a. From Node Manager click Go > Monitoring > Alarms and Events and
verify the Replaceable Unit Missing alarm is displayed:
15 Reseat the SM that was partially removed in step 13 as follows:
a. Slide the SM fully into the slot.
b. Place the top and bottom ejectors in their closed positions (parallel to the
faceplate).
c. Note time ____________.
d. Tighten two screws to secure the SM.
e. Verify that the 15T-SM is operational by observing that the green ACTIVE
LED illuminates within two minutes.
f. Verify standby SM (5430 Switch in slot 9 and 5410 Switch in slot 4)
display blinking green indicating SECONDARY Role.
g. Wait a total of five minutes and verify no Replaceable Unit or Data Plane
Health Failure alarms are reported.
16 Repeat step 13 through step 15 for each additional SM.
17 Record results in the column labeled in Section N: Module LED status and
redundancy tests.
Continue the turn-up and test process in the next section.
Testing LEDs
The ACO/LED test switch on the 5400 Switch is an dual-function push button
(toggle) switch. The ACO/LED test switch is located:
• For 5430 Switch - at the front of the 5430 Switch (5430 Switch LED Test
Switch)
• For 5410 Switch - at the front of the CTM (5410 Switch LED Test Switch)
Figure 4-28
5430 Switch LED Test Switch
—continued—


Step Action
18 For the 5430 Switch, push and hold the switch button for three seconds or
longer to start the LED test sequence which toggles the display module bi-
color LEDs to switch between red and green every second.
19 For the 5410 Switch push and hold the switch button located in front of the
Primary CTM.
The LED test continues until approximately one minute after the ACO/LED
switch is released.
Figure 4-29
5410 Switch LED Test Switch
Console Bay Status
Ports Indicators
DCN Expansion
DCN1 ES1
ES3
CRITICAL
LINK/ACT 134-0183-900
MAJOR
MINOR
PWR A
PWR B
ACO
MNT
ACT
SEC
FLT
PRI
DCN2 ES2
CTM Status
To test system LED, perform the following steps.

20 With the system powered on, open all front access doors.
21 Observe the LEDs presently lit. These LEDs include those on the display
module, PDUs, fan modules, and each CTM, SM, and LM.
—continued—


Step Action
22 On the 5430 Switch, press and hold for three seconds, the ACO/LED switch
on the display module or on the 5410 Switch, press and hold for three
seconds the ACO switch on the primary CTM.
ATTENTION
For the 5430 Switch display panel, the LED test sequence toggles the PDU
display module bi-color LEDs Power A, Power B, and power feed LEDs 2
through 7 to switch between red and green every second. LEDs 1 and 8
remain Green (on both Power A and Power B) and do not flash red.
For the 5410 Switch PDUs, PDU feed LEDs 1 through 3 switch between red
and green every second.
SFP/XFP/CFP tricolor LEDs cycle red, green and yellow.
CTM ES1/ES2/ES3/ES4 LINK/ACT LEDs are not lit during the LED test.
23 Verify that all system LEDs on the 5430 Switch display panel, 5430 Switch
and 5410 Switch PDUs, fan assemblies, CTMs, SMs, SFP/XFPs/CFPs, and
LMs are lit. Record results on Section O: LED test.
After five minutes all LED status returns to normal. If any LED fails to light,
additional troubleshooting or module replacement must be performed to
correct the problem.
24 If required, refer to Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed
to test PDU power feeds.
25 Close all access doors, and re-install all covers.
Continue the turn-up and test process from the next section.
—end—

Procedure 4-9
Performing the final system stability test
Use this procedure to perform the final system stability test.
ATTENTION
Ciena's standard Statement of Work (SOW) for commissioning, is to test
Verify that the system is Alarm free before continuing with this procedure.
The following are required in order to test:

• xSLM-2: 5 jumpers and 4 attenuators
• xSLM-48: 49jumpers and 48 attenuators
• xSLM-50: 51jumpers and 50 attenuators
• Install all LMs in accordance with Customer Work
Order.
Procedure
Step Action
Note: Prior to tightening module faceplate screws, inspect the screws to

ensure that screws are not bent and that threads are not crossed.
1 Check CTM, SM, LM, and blank panel vertical alignment and ensure that all
faceplates are flush against the chassis. Use a torque driver to tighten CTM,
SM, and LM faceplate screws to 3 inch-pounds (.34 newton-meters) of
torque.
2 Allow the final configuration to run for a minimum of eight hours (actual
duration may vary according to customer specifications).
3 Record results on Section M: LM LED status and functional test.
4 Using the Node Manager screens, perform the following actions in the order
listed:
a. At the Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect screen, select the cross
b. Delete all CTP entries.

c. Lock all PTPs created for the LM that was tested.

—continued—


Performing the final system stability test
Step Action
d. Verify that all unused slots and LMs have been deleted from the Node
Manager inventory.
5 Remove all fiber optic test jumpers (including test leads) and re-install all
optical interface dust caps.
CAUTION
Airflow advisory, high temperature damage,
communication degradation
5400 Switch modules require forced convection
cooling. To achieve efficient cooling, all covers must be
in place, all doors properly closed, all filler panels
installed in unused slots, and both system fans
operating. Open slots, doors, covers, or inoperative
fans, may lead to overheating and degradation or
failure of electronic components.
ATTENTION
Ensure that all modules are secured in place by the retaining screws on each
module faceplate.
Ensure that all provisioning used during the system operation test process
(such as protection groups or circuits) has been removed before releasing
the equipment to the customer.
Continue the turn-up and test process with the next chapter, 5400 Switch
cabling.
—end—


5-1
5400 Switch cabling 5-
This chapter provides the cabling procedures for the 5400 Switch. The chapter
includes the following procedures:
• Connecting Site Cables
• Connecting Site Fiber Optic Cables

5-2 5400 Switch cabling
Procedure 5-1
Connecting Site Cables
A 10/100 Mbps Ethernet connection can be used for communication between
a Personal Computer (PC) or a Unix™ Workstation running Node Manager
(by way of a router or switch) and the 5400 Switch CTMs. The physical
Ethernet interface to the CTMs is through RJ-45 connectors on the I/O
module.
The pin-out for these connectors conforms to standards used for RJ-45
terminals. Individual Main and Auxiliary Ethernet RJ-45 connectors are
associated with each CTM. These Ethernet connectors are designated as
follows:
• 5430 Switch I/O Module - DCN ports (T1 I/O Module for the 5430 Switch
and E1 I/O Module for the 5430 Switch)
• 5410 Switch I/O Module - DCN ports (5410 Switch T1 I/O Module and
5410 Switch E1 I/O Module)
CAUTION
Risk of damage to modules and backplanes
This equipment contains devices that are sensitive to
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Wear grounding straps when
handling equipment, and follow approved ESD procedures
ATTENTION
Services-Photonics Layer Interop (SPLI) interop with the 6500 Packet-
Optical platform can be through the 5400 DCN or through the CTM ES ports
however, not both.Do not connect cables to the CTM ES ports if using DCN
for SPLI.
Procedure
Step Action
1 The user must connect the customer site Ethernet cables to the appropriate
10/100 Ethernet connectors on the 5400 Switch I/O module (T1 I/O Module
for the 5430 Switch - 5410 Switch E1 I/O Module). The cable tags attached
to the previously routed Ethernet cables provide connection guidance.
—continued—

5400 Switch cabling 5-3

Figure 5-1
T1 I/O Module for the 5430 Switch
Figure 5-2
E1 I/O Module for the 5430 Switch
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 5-3
5410 Switch T1 I/O Module
Figure 5-4
5410 Switch E1 I/O Module
—continued—


I/O Connectors
Each 5410 Switch I/O module has the following external I/O connectors (5410
Switch I/O Alarm Connector (E1 shown)):
• The DB-15 Alarm connector provides alarm outputs from CTM Modules to
the IOM. The alarm outputs are visual major, minor, critical alarm signals
and a summary audio alarm.
• Four Ethernet connectors to provide a communications path to the Node
Manager application (by way of a router or switch). The Ethernet
connector pinout is the standard used for RJ-45 terminal connections. The
four Ethernet connectors provide redundant DCN1 and DCN2
connections to the CTMs. Ethernet connectors are designated as DCN1
Main and DCN1 AUX which connect to A-CTM and DCN2 Main and DCN2
AUX which connect to C-CTM. The far-end Ethernet port connected to this
port must be set to autonegotiate for speed and duplex operation.
• BITS (timing interface) connectors to provide input for an external timing
source. The T1 I/O module uses 4 three pin wire wrap connectors. The E1
I/O module uses four BNC connectors.
Figure 5-5
5410 Switch I/O Alarm Connector (E1 shown)
—end—

Procedure 5-2
Connecting Site Fiber Optic Cables
This procedure describes how to systematically connect site fiber optical
cables to the LMs supported by the 5400 Switch:
• xSLM-1 LM for use with up to 1 CFP
• xSLM-5 LM for use with up to 5 CFP+
• xSLM-12 LM for use with up to 12 XFP
• xSLM-48 LM for use with up to 48 SFP
• xSLM-50 LM for use with up to 50 SFP+
To connect each pair (transmit and receive) of site fiber to a SFP/SFP+/XFP/

CFP/CFP2, the following steps are performed.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Determine if the site fiber pair is to be attached to a SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/

CFP.
2 Remove the protective dust caps/covers from the optical connectors.
3 Clean the optical bulkhead connectors (LM Fiber Optical Connections) in
accordance with the procedures in Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety
Practices (Part Number 009-2003-121).
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 5-6
LM Fiber Optical Connections
ATTENTION
Ensure that all site fiber cables to be attached to ports with LC interfaces are
terminated with LC connectors. If any site fiber cable is terminated with either
SC or FC connectors, an FC-to-LC or SC-to-LC cable adapter must be used
for connection to these ports.
4 Clean the connectors of the site fiber pair in accordance with the procedures
in Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices (Part Number 009-2003-
121).
CAUTION
Optical Connector and Fiber damage
To prevent damage to any optical connector or attached fiber,
be careful when handling and when inserting connectors into
or extracting connectors from any SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.
—continued—


Step Action
5 Connect the site fiber cable pair to the transmit and receive optical interface
connectors located on the port. Push the connectors into their optical port
interfaces until their connector casings lock firmly in place. Refer to the cable
tags attached to the previously routed fiber cables for connection guidance.
6 Repeat step 1 through step 5 to connect the remaining site fiber cable pairs.
7 After all site fiber cable pairs have been connected, loosely wrap the top
routed and bottom routed group of cables with Velcro cable ties provided in
the fiber management kit (Line module fiber optic cables (shown w/fiber
guides & Velcro tie)).
Figure 5-7
Fiber Bender Guide Installation
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 5-8
Line module fiber optic cables (shown w/fiber guides & Velcro tie)
—end—

Procedure 5-3
Operating the (handheld) optical fiber scope
Overview
This procedure provides the method used to operate the Noyes™ handheld
optical fiber scope. Noyes optical fiber scope shows the basic components of
the Noyes™ optical fiber scope. This procedure may be necessary to inspect
fibers routed to the 5400 Switch.
Figure 5-9
Noyes optical fiber scope
Required tools
• ESD guard wrist strap
• ESD guard heel grounders
• Noyes™ handheld optical fiber scope
• LC adapter for optical fiber scope
Prerequisites
• The fiber optic scope adapters must be cleaned before use.
• The user must be trained in safety procedures of laser-based systems.
• Ciena Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices

Procedure
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments class 1 laser
product. Laser emissions may cause eye damage. Never look
directly into fiber connectors. Always assume that laser
radiation is present even when equipment is turned off.
CAUTION
Traffic disruption risk
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption.
This instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not
been tested for all possible applications or configurations, and
may not be complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Remove all optical connector dust caps from modules and

backplane before installing modules.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs/modules
equipment and follow ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
The Noyes™ handheld optical fiber scope is used only to inspect known dark
connectors and should be used only if a video scope is not available.
When inspecting fiber connectors that connect to high power laser/

amplification sources (that is, OAV, OAF, or Raman amplifier modules), a
high resolution video scope similar to the Westover® Scientific Fiber
Inspection Scope must be used.
Step Action
1 Use an optical power meter (Measuring optical power level) to verify that the
connection to be viewed is dark.
2 Select the correct clean cable connector adapter and screw onto optical fiber
scope, if applicable.
—continued—


Step Action
3 Attach the cable connector to the optical fiber scope adapter as shown in
Noyes optical fiber scope.
4 Press the ON button.
5 Hold the viewer against the eye and view the fiber connector for cleanliness.
6 Adjust the focus knob, if necessary.
7 Inspect each optical connector with the optical fiber scope before mating it to
any system component (Clean multi-mode fiber through Connector brushes
against skin). If there is no evidence of contamination (that is, dust, dirt, film,
or particles) on the fiber end face, do not clean the connector. If contamination
is evident, perform the associated cleaning procedures in the Standard
Cleaning and Equipment Safety Practices Manual.
ATTENTION
Clean multi-mode fiber through Connector brushes against skin provide
examples of both clean and contaminated (that is, dirty) fiber connectors.
Connectors should always be cleaned before being interconnected. A
microscopic bit of dirt or contamination can damage the connector and/or
degrade performance. Dirt can act as a lens to focus the high power and
actually burn the interconnection.
Clean multi-mode fiber shows a typical clean multi-mode fiber. As indicated,

multi-mode fiber has a large core in the center. The black ring is the bonding
agent that secures the fiber to the connector.
Figure 5-10
Clean multi-mode fiber
Clean single-mode fiber shows a clean single-mode fiber. As indicated,

single-mode fiber has a very small core in the center.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 5-11
Clean single-mode fiber
Dirty connector shows a dirty fiber that has been exposed to normal field
conditions.
Figure 5-12
Dirty connector
—continued—


Step Action
Connector cleaned with lint-free cloth shows a fiber that has been cleaned
using a lint-free cloth. As indicated, lint remains on the fiber surface. Optical
quality tissues should be used in lieu of a lint-free cloth.
Figure 5-13
Connector cleaned with lint-free cloth
Connector cleaned with alcohol shows a fiber connector that has been
cleaned using an alcohol pad. As indicated, drops of alcohol are visible
covering the surface which, when dry, turns into a haze. Alcohol can be used
to clean optical connectors; however, the alcohol should be immediately wiped
off the connector using a clean optical quality tissue.
Figure 5-14
Connector cleaned with alcohol
—continued—


Step Action
Connector brushes against skin shows a fiber connector that has been gently
brushed by a finger tip. This type of contamination can also occur when a
technician accidentally brushes the connector when making a connection.
Figure 5-15
Connector brushes against skin
—end—


6-1
Commissioning, testing, and expansion

procedures 6-
Procedures
Communications management procedures lists the procedures used in
commissioning, testing and expanding the 5400 Switch. Procedures are listed
by order of use in the commissioning process. General procedures are
contained within this chapter.
Table 6-1
Communications management procedures
Procedure
Verifying 5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationVerifying

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationConnecting to the
CTM and using a laptop to connect to the console port

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationConnect and log on to
Node Manager via Ethernet interface

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationAdding 5400 Switch
channel capacity

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationMeasuring optical
power level

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationTesting spare SFPs/
XFPs/CFPs and Line Modules
Test single eSLM module
Test multiple eSLM modules

5430 Switch A/B return and -48V terminal isolationTesting spare CTMs
Testing spare Switch Modules

6-2 Commissioning, testing, and expansion procedures
Table 6-1
Communications management procedures
Procedure
Testing spare Fans
Test line modules, SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 and unequipped LM slots
Removing, deleting or installing an pluggable optic
Test 5400 Switch LEDs
Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure
Using the 5430 Switch fiber management tool
Decommissioning a 5430 switch

Commissioning, testing, and expansion procedures 6-3
Procedure 6-1
Connecting to the CTM and using a laptop to connect
to the console port
Overview
This procedure describes how to connect to the 5400 Switch CTM using a
laptop computer.
Required tools
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard heel grounders
• Laptop computer running Windows XP®or Linux
• HyperTerminal available on the laptop computer
Prerequisites
• The user must use proper module handling procedures. When handling,
installing, or removing modules, the following precautions must be
observed.
– Ensure modules are stored in ESD-protective packaging when not
installed in an equipment shelf.
– Do not stack modules on or against each other.
– Pick up modules by the front handle, and do not touch components
on the circuit board.
• The user must be familiar with 5400 Node Manager software.
• The user must have Node Manager Termination Point Provisioner
privilege or Node Manager Troubleshooter (TS) privilege.
• The craftsperson must be a registered system user with a valid user name
and password to log in to the Command Line Interface (CLI).
• The user must have a knowledge of TL1 commands and of using the 5400
Switch TL1 Interface Manual.
• None

Procedure
Step Action
1 Use the appropriate cable to connect to the CNSL port on the CTM being
accessed.
2 Connect the opposite end of the cable to the serial port or use a serial-USB
adapter to connect to the USB port on the laptop.
3 Start the HyperTerminal program and create a new connection with the Com
port settings as follows:
a. Bits per second - 19200
b. Data Bits - 8
c. Parity - None
d. Stop Bits - 1
e. Flow Control - None
4 At the HyperTerminal prompt on the PC, press Enter and enter the User
Name and Password.
5 The Maintenance Menu is displayed.
--------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- MAINTENANCE MENU ----
--------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 Display system configuration
---- 2 Display module status
---- 3 Upgrade or revert software release
---- 4 Backup database
---- 5 Restore database
---- 6 Perform system operations
---- 7 Modify system configuration
---- 10 Log off
--------------------------------------------------------
1-A-CTM:P> (rel_cn5430_3.0.1.0_cl634166, 5430-SVT-a64)
Enter Choice (? for help): ?
6 Stop the HyperTerminal program and disconnect the cable.
—end—

Procedure 6-2
Connect and log on to Node Manager via Ethernet
interface
Overview
This procedure describes how to connect and log on to the 5400 Switch Node
Manager software. The 5400 Node Manager User Guide provides additional
information.
Required tools
• Common hand tools
• 10base-T, RJ-45 crossover cable
• 5400 Node Manager software
• Personal Computer (PC) running Windows XP®
Prerequisites
• The user must be familiar with Microsoft® Windows software.
• Node Manager Fundamentals (-195)
Procedure
CAUTION
To establish a 5400 Node Manager connection, step 1 through step 5 are

performed.
To log on to 5400 Node Manager, step 6 through step 8 are performed.
—continued—


Connect and log on to Node Manager via Ethernet interface
Step Action
Establish 5400 node manager connection

1 Set the laptop IP address and the subnet mask to the same IP address and
subnet mask as the 5400 Switch.
2 Connect the crossover cable to the DCN port on the 5430 Switch I/O module
or 5410 Switch CTM.
Figure 6-1
5430 Switch I/O module (T1 shown)
Figure 6-2
5410 Switch CTM
Console Bay Status
Ports Indicators
DCN Expansion
DCN1 ES1
ES3
CRITICAL
LINK/ACT 134-0183-900
MAJOR
MINOR
PWR A
PWR B
ACO
MNT
ACT
SEC
FLT
PRI

DCN2 ES2
CTM Status
3 Connect the opposite end of the cable to the Ethernet connector on the
laptop.
—continued—


Connect and log on to Node Manager via Ethernet interface
Step Action
4 Apply power to the PC.

5 On the PC, start a node manager session.
Log on to the 5400 node manager connection
ATTENTION
The node is preconfigured with three user accounts: administrator (factory
default password is admin1!), superuser (factory default password is
superuser1!), and EMSUser (factory default password is EMSUser1!).
6 At the Windows desktop, select Start > All Programs > Node Manager for
5400 > Node Manager 5400.
The Node Manager command window opens and is minimized. After the
connection is established, the Node Manager - New Node Login dialog box
opens. The Node URL and User Name fields may appear with default
entries.
7 In the Node Manager - New Node Login dialog box, enter the name of the
node in the Node Url field, or click the Node Url drop-down menu to view a
list of the nodes entered in the Host property line of the env.txt file.
ATTENTION
To enter a node name, use one of the following formats:
Domain Name (for example, venus.lab.dept.xyz.com)
Node Name:IPAddress (for example, venus:11.120.30.11)
All node names are case-sensitive.
8 Enter the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields.
9 Select the Remember Node Name check box to have Node Manager
automatically log on to the node entered in step 7.
10 Select Use SFTP to use a secure FTP connection to the node.
11 Click OK.
The Login Successful screen is displayed.
12 Click OK.
The Administration > System Configuration screen is displayed.
—end—

Procedure 6-3
Adding 5400 Switch channel capacity
Overview
This procedure describes how to add 5400 Switch channel capacity. Adding
channel capacity consists of adding SFPs/XFPs/CFPs only, adding line
modules (LMs) only, or adding LMs and SFPs/XFPs/CFPs. This procedure
also defines the testing required to ensure that the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs, LMs,
and applicable switch modules (SMs) are operational prior to customer
acceptance.
Table 6-2
Switch module matrix for 1.2Tb 5410 Switch and 3.6Tb 5430 Switch

5410 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM- 16 32 48 48
Flex
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM- 4 8 12 12 Not Applicable
12D, MSLM-10G
5430 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM- 4 12 16 24 32 36 44 48 48
Flex
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM- 1 3 4 6 8 9 11 12 12
12D
Ports Supported on v xSLM-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

Table 6-3

5410 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM- 16 32 48 48
Flex
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM- 4 8 12 12
12D, MSLM-10G
Ports Supported on each xSLM-3 1 2 3 3 Not Applicable
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 1 2 2 2
(2xOTU4)
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 0 1 2 2
(with 16QAM) (2xOTUC2)
Ports supported on each OSLM-50-10G 16 332 50 50 Not Applicable
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-100G 1 3 5 5
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-WL3n 1 3 5 5
5430 Switch
Ports Supported on each xSLM-48, MSLM- 4 12 16 24 32 36 44 48 48
Flex
Ports Supported on each xSLM-12, TSLM- 1 3 4 6 8 9 11 12 12
12D
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
(2xOTU4)
Ports supported on each 2-FLEX3-WL3 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2
(with 16QAM) (2xOTUC2)
Ports supported on each OSLM-5-WL3n 0 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5
Required tools


• Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) test set
Prerequisites
• The user must have Node Manager Account Administrator privilege.
• The user must be familiar with using a SONET test set.
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement
(-545)
Procedure
CAUTION
CAUTION
Notify appropriate personnel before removing operation-critical
components.
Performance of the following procedure may cause a traffic

disruption. This instruction is intended as a general guide only,
has not been tested for all possible applications or
configurations, and may not be complete or accurate for some
situations.
To add SFPs/XFPs/CFPs to existing LMs, perform step through step 3.
To install additional LMs and SFPs/XFPs/CFPs, perform step 4 and step 6.


Adding 5400 Switch channel capacity
Step Action
Install additional SFPs/XFPs/CFPs

1 Using the information outlined in Switch module matrix for 1.2Tb 5410 Switch
and 3.6Tb 5430 Switch or Switch module matrix for 5Tb 5410 Switch and
15Tb 5430 Switch, ensure that at least the minimum number of SMs are
installed in the 5400 Switch for the number of SFPs/XFPs/CFPs being
installed. If there are not enough SMs present for the additional SFPs/XFPs/
CFPs, contact Ciena Technical Support to order the necessary SMs.
2 Install required SFPs/XFPs/CFPs in accordance with Installing SFP/XFP/
ATTENTION
Testing modules is optional. Test modules only if required to do so by local
practices.
Spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs may be needed to test all SFPs/XFPs/CFPs slots

in the newly installed LM. If no spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs are available at the
site, obtain SFPs/XFPs/CFPs from Ciena Technical Support and return
when testing is completed.
3 Test any installed SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.

Install additional LMs
4 Install new LMs in accordance with 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault
Management - Module Replacement (-545).
5 Install required SFPs/XFPs/CFPs in accordance with Removing, deleting or
installing an pluggable optic.
ATTENTION
Testing modules is optional. Test modules only if required to do so by local
practices.
Spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs may be needed to test all SFPs/XFPs/CFPs slots

in the newly installed LM. If no spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs are available at the
site, obtain SFPs/XFPs/CFPs from Ciena Technical Support and return
when testing is completed.
6 Test all added LMs in accordance with Test line modules, SFP/SFP+/XFP/
CFP/CFP2 and unequipped LM slots.
—end—

Procedure 6-4
Measuring optical power level
Overview
This procedure describes how to measure optical power levels on 5400
Switch SFPs/XFPs/CFPs. This procedure disrupts traffic if performed on
traffic carrying SFPs/XFPs/CFPs.
Required tools
• Optical power meter
• 5400 Switch Node Manager software
Prerequisites
observed:
• The user must be familiar with 5400 Switch Node Manager software.
• Ciena Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices
• System Description (-100)
• Configuration - Provisioning and Operating (-310)

Procedure
CAUTION
CAUTION
Remove all optical connector dust caps from modules and

backplane before installing modules.
CAUTION
Step Action
Prepare xSLM for testing

1 Remove traffic from the SFP/XFP.
2 Establish a 5400 Node Manager session and click Go > Inventory.
a. In the equipment tree, expand the 5400 Switch node view until the
desired SFP/XFP is displayed and select the SFP/XFP.
b. In the details frame, select the Basic tab.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select No Alarm Reporting from
the ARC State drop-down menu to disable equipment alarms.
d. Click Accept.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Locked from the Admin
State drop-down menu.
d. Click Accept.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Click YES to the pop-up window message and observe the Transmitter
State change to OFF.
5 Disconnect the fiber from the transmit connector.
6 Clean the SFP/XFP connector and the test cable using Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices as a guide.
7 Note the wavelength of the SFP.
8 Connect the fiber to the transmit connector of the SFP/XFP.
9 Reinstall the SFP/XFP.
10 Select Go > Inventory.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Alarm Reporting from the
ARC State drop-down menu to enable equipment alarms.
d. Click Accept.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Unlocked from the Admin
d. Click Accept.
12 Click YES on the pop-up window message and observe the Transmitter
State change to ON.
13 Configure the SFP/XFP Physical Termination Point (PTP) using Node
Manager User Guide, Creating a Physical Termination Point.
14 Perform the optical power test (starting with step 15).
Optical power test
15 Connect the test cable connector to the power meter optical adapter.
16 Set the switch to the ON position. Observe that a display is visible.
17 Select the wavelength and ensure it matches the SFP wavelength noted in
step 7.
18 Read the power level value on the meter display and verify that results are
within the range specified in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System
Description (-100).
—continued—


Step Action
a. If the power level is within the specified range proceed to next step.
b. If the power level is not within the specified range, replace the SFP in
accordance with the Removing, deleting or installing an pluggable optic.
19 If required, record results on the applicable data sheet.
20 Reconnect the fiber.
—end—

Procedure 6-5
Testing spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Line Modules
Use this procedure to test spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and LMs.
Testing spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and LMs can be done as part of the

unequipped slot testing described in Testing Remaining Line Module Slots. It
is recommended that spare modules be tested as early as possible during the
unequipped slot testing.
ATTENTION
Each time an SFP/XFP/CFPs or LM is removed from a spare slot after the
slot testing is completed, that SFP/XFP/CFPs or LM must be deleted from
the Node Manager database.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Instead of using a previously tested LM to test one of the unequipped slots,

populate spare LM with spare SFPs/XFPs/CFPs (and tested SFPs/XFPs/
CFPs as necessary). Follow the module-handling guidelines in Proper
module handling.
2 Install the LM in an unequipped slot as described on Testing line module slot.
3 Prepare the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs for testing as described in Installing SFP/XFP/
4 As applicable, follow the instructions under Testing Ports (OTN with SONET/
SDH payload).
—end—

Procedure 6-6
Use this procedure to test a single eSLM module.
Prerequisites
Before you perform this procedure, make sure that:
• You used the Testing line module slot and the Verifying Line Module Status
from Node Manager procedure to install and verify eSLM status.
• You used the Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED
Status procedure to install optics and test the output power.
• You have a 10G and/or 100G Ethernet test set and fiber-optic cables.
• You have a Node Manager session.
• You used Change line module port group mode to configure the eSLM with
the correct PG Mode.
• A100G port on an OSLM-1 or OSLM-5 is available to test port 19.
Test ports 1 to 12 (PG mode 6x10G_SFPP_6x10G_XFP), the eSLM uses the
factory default PG mode which uses XFP Ports 1-6 and SFP+ Ports 7-12. All
other ports are UAS.
Test ports 7 to 18 (PG mode 12x10G_SFPP), use Change line module port
group mode to change the PG mode to 12x10G_SFPP which uses SFP+
ports 7 - 18. All other ports are UAS.
Test port 1 and 2 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_XFP), use Change line module
port group mode to change the PG mode which uses XFP ports 1, 2. Then
Test port 19 which uses CFP port 19 (100GbE). All other ports are UAS.
Test port 7 and 8 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS), use Change line

module port group mode to change the PG mode which uses SFP+ ports 7
and 8. Then Test port 19 which uses CFP port 19 (100GbE). All other ports
are UAS.
Post-requisites
• Only for initial node commissioning, remove all jumpers, delete Node
Manager port 19 provisioning, and reseat both CTMs to clear layer 2
provisioning.
• For channel adds on traffic carrying nodes, remove all jumpers, delete
Node Manager port 19 provisioning, and use sub-port delete sub-port
and virtual-switch detach commands to clear layer 2 provisioning.

Procedure
Step Action
Prepare 10G and 100G digital test sets

1 Use the Configure 10G and 100G test sets for eSLM test procedure to
configure the 10G and 100G test sets.
Test ports 1 to 12 (PG mode 6x10G_SFPP_6x10G_XFP)
2 Use Jumpers connections to test ports 1 to 12 to jumper the eSLM ports and
connect the test set. Ensure that each port Admin State is Unlocked.
Figure 6-3
Jumpers connections to test ports 1 to 12
eSLM
T
R 1
T
R
T
R
Test ports 1 to 12
T
R
T
R
T
R 6
8 T T
7 10G Tester
R R
T T
R R
T T
12 R R 11
T T
14 R R 13
T T
R R
T T
18 R R 17
T
19
R
5400-16003
—continued—


Step Action
When instructed to use SAOS CLI commands to test the ports, use the eSLM
slot number for to replace “CardA” as shown in the following example:
If instructed to enter:
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardA-7-port-CardA-
1
With eSLM in slot 1-A-11, you would enter:
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-11-7-port-11-1
3 Enter the following SAOS commands to create backplane interconnections
between Card A ports 1 to 6 and SFP+ ports 7 to 12.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! VIRTUAL SWITCH CONFIG:
!
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardA-7-port-CardA-1
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
!
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-port-CardA-1 parent-port CardA/1 classifier-
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-port-CardA-10 parent-port CardA/10
classifier-precedence 100
sub-port add sub-port sp-100-port-CardA-1 class-element 1 vtag-stack 100

—continued—


Step Action

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! VIRTUAL INTERFACE CONFIG:
!
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-port-CardA-7 vs vs-100-port-
CardA-7-port-CardA-1
ATTENTION
Do not use the configuration save command.
the port is locked and verify test set is configured to send frame with VLAN
ID- 100 //. Start the test and verify the eSLMs runs error-free for five minutes.
—continued—


Step Action
5 Record the test results.

supported by the SFP.
interface connectors on the SFP.
Test ports 7 to 18 (PG mode 12x10G_SFPP)
6 Use Jumpers connections to test ports 7 to 18 to jumper the eSLM ports and
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-4
Jumpers connections to test ports 7 to 18
eSLM
T
R 1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R 6
8 T T
7 10G Tester
R R
T T
R R
T T
12 R R 11
Test ports 7 to 18
T T
14 R R 13
T T
R R
T T
18 R R 17
T
19
R
5400-16004
—continued—


Step Action

between Card A ports 1 to 6 and SFP+ ports 7 to 12.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100

—continued—


Step Action
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
ATTENTION
—continued—


Step Action
Test port 1 and 2 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_XFP)

10 Use Jumpers connections to test ports 1 and 2 to jumper the eSLM ports and
Figure 6-5
Jumpers connections to test ports 1 and 2
Test ports 1 and 2
eSLM
T
1
10G Tester
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R 6
T T
8 R R 7
T T
R R
T T
12 R R 11
T T
14 R R 13
T T
R R
T T
18 R R 17
T
19
R
5400-16006
—continued—


Step Action

between Card A XFP ports 1 and 2.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
precedence 100
precedence 100
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
ATTENTION
—continued—


Step Action
Test port 7 and 8 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS)

virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardscA-7-port-
CardA-8
Figure 6-6
Jumpers connections to test ports 7 and 8
eSLM
T
R 1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T Test ports 7 and 8

R 6
8 T T
7 10G Tester
R R
T T
R R
T T
12 R R 11
T T
14 R R 13
T T
R R
T T
18 R R 17
T
19
R
5400-16007
—continued—


Step Action

between Card A SFP+ ports 7and 8.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
precedence 100
precedence 100
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
ATTENTION
Test port 19
To test port 19, you need an available 100G port on an OSLM-1 or OSLM-5
with port group mode set to 1x100G_OTN.

connect the test sets. Ensure that each port Admin State is Unlocked.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-7
Jumpers connections to test port 19
eSLM
T
R 1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R 6
T T
8 R R 7
T T
R R
T T
12 R R 11
T T
14 R R 13
T T
R R
T T
18 R R 17 Test port 19
xSLM-1,
OSLM-5
T
T 19
100G
R
Tester R
5400-16008
19 Establish a Node Manager session and click Go > Configuring >

Connection TPs > ODU CTPs.
20 In the list frame, click New.
21 In the details frame click Size and select ODU4.
a. Click Supporting TP ... selector box, select Mapper Service tab, select
the eSLM and click Apply.
b. Click Time Slots ... selector box, select all time slots, and click Apply.
c. Click Ex. Payload Type and select GFP(0x05).
d. Click Tributary Port and enter 1.
e. Click Accept.
—continued—


Step Action
22 Click Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect.

23 In the list frame, click New.
24 In the details frame, enter a name for the cross connect in the Name field.
25 In the details frame under A EndPoint, click Use Existing.
a. Click Supporting TP ... selector box, select Mapper Service tab, select
the eSLM and click Apply.
b. Click Size drop down list and select ODU4.
26 In the details frame under Z EndPoint, click Create New.
a. Click Supporting TP ... selector box, select OTUTTP tab, select the
OSLM port and click Apply.
27 In the Cross Connects details frame, click Accept.
28 When instructed to use SAOS CLI commands to test the ports, use the eSLM
between CFP port 19 and backplane port 20:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
ATTENTION
—continued—


Step Action
—end—

Procedure 6-7
If the 5400 Switch contains multiple eSLM modules, use this procedure to test
the eSLM modules, two modules at a time.
Prerequisites
Before you perform this procedure, make sure that:
• You used the Testing line module slot and the Verifying Line Module Status
from Node Manager procedure to install and verify eSLM status.
• You used the Installing SFP/XFP/CFP and Verifying SFP/XFP/CFP LED
Status procedure to install optics and test the output power.
• You have a 10G and/or 100G Ethernet test set and fiber-optic cables.
• You have a Node Manager session.
ATTENTION
In subsequent steps we refer to the two eSLM modules to be tested as
Card A and Card B.
Test ports 1 to 12 (PFG mode 6x10G_SFPP_6x10G_XFP) jumpered per

Connections to test two eSLMs, the eSLM uses the factory default PG mode
which uses XFP Ports 1-6 and SFP+ Ports 7-12. All other ports are UAS.
Test ports 7 to 18 (PG mode 12x10G_SFPP) jumpered per Connections to

test two eSLMs, use Change line module port group mode to change the PG
mode which uses SFP+ ports 7 - 18. All other ports are UAS.
Test port 19 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS, 1x100G_2x10G_XFP)

jumpered per Connections to test two eSLMs, use Change line module port
group mode to change the PG mode to 1x100G_2x10G_XFP which uses XFP
ports 1, 2, and CFP port 19 (100GbE) or 1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS which
uses SFP+ ports 7, 8, and CFP port 19 (100GbE). To test ports 1 and 2 only
or ports 7 and 8 only, refer to Test single eSLM module
Post-requisites
• Only for initial node commissioning, remove all jumpers and reseat both
CTMs to clear layer 2 provisioning.
• For channel adds on traffic carrying nodes, remove all jumpers and use
sub-port delete sub-port and virtual-switch detach commands
to clear layer 2 provisioning.

Procedure
Step Action
Prepare 10G and 100G digital test sets

1 Use the Configure 10G and 100G test sets for eSLM test procedure to
configure the 10G and 100G test sets.
Install fiber jumpers
2 Use Connections to test two eSLMs to jumper the eSLM ports and connect
the test sets. Note that the test sets are connected to “Card B”.
Figure 6-8
Connections to test two eSLMs
—continued—


Step Action
Test ports 1 to 12 (PFG mode 6x10G_SFPP_6x10G_XFP) jumpered per Connections to test two
eSLMs
slot numbers for to replace “CardA” and “CardB” as shown in the following
example:
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardA-6-port-CardB-
12
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardB-1-port-CardA-
7
You would enter:
between Card A and Card B XFP ports 1 to 6 and SFP+ ports 7 to 12.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardA-1-port-CardB-7
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-port-CardB-1-port-CardA-7
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
precedence 100
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-port-CardB-7 parent-port CardB/7 classifier-
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
—continued—


Step Action
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-port-CardB-10 parent-port CardB/10

precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100

sub-port add sub-port sp-100-port-CardB-7 class-element 1 vtag-stack 100
—continued—


Step Action

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
CardA-1-port-CardB-7
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-port-CardB-7 vs vs-100-port-
CardB-1-port-CardA-7
—continued—


Step Action

ATTENTION
Test ports 7 to 18 (PG mode 12x10G_SFPP) jumpered per Connections to test two eSLMs
example:
You would enter:
—continued—


Step Action

between Card A and Card B SFP+ ports 7 to 12.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-CardA-7-CardB-13
virtual-switch create vs vs-100-CardB-7-CardA-13
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-CardA-7 parent-port CardA/7 classifier-
precedence 100
sub-port create sub-port sp-100-CardB-13 parent-port CardB/13 classifier-
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
—continued—


Step Action

precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
precedence 100
sub-port add sub-port sp-100-CardA-7 class-element 1 vtag-stack 100

sub-port add sub-port sp-100-CardB-13 class-element 1 vtag-stack 100
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-CardA-7 vs vs-100-CardA-7-
CardB-13
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-CardB-13 vs vs-100-CardA-7-
CardB-13
CardB-14
CardB-14
—continued—


Step Action

CardB-15
CardB-15
CardB-16
CardB-16
CardB-17
CardB-17
CardB-18
CardB-18
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-CardB-7 vs vs-100-CardB-7-
CardA-13
virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp-100-CardA-13 vs vs-100-CardB-7-
CardA-13
CardA-14
CardA-14
CardA-15
CardA-15
CardA-16
CardA-16
CardA-17
CardA-17
CardA-18
CardA-18
ATTENTION
—continued—


Step Action
8 Record the results of the test of ports 7 to 18.

Test port 19 (PG mode 1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS, 1x100G_2x10G_XFP) jumpered per
Connections to test two eSLMs
ATTENTION
Refer to Test single eSLM module to Test port 1 and 2 (PG mode
1x100G_2x10G_XFP) 2 or Test port 7 and 8 (PG mode
1x100G_2x10G_SFP_PLUS).
example:
You would enter:
between Card A and Card B CFP port 19.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! SUB-PORT CONFIG:
precedence 100
precedence 100


—continued—


Step Action
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
CardB-19
CardB-19
ATTENTION
11 Record the results of the test.
—end—

Procedure 6-8
Configure 10G and 100G test sets for eSLM test
Perform this procedure to configure the test sets to test eSLMs.
Procedure
Step Action
Preparing the 10G and 100G digital test sets

1 Configure the 10G digital test set as shown inConfiguration of the 10G digital
test set (one), Configuration of the 10G digital test set (two), and
Configuration of the 10G digital test set (three).
CAUTION
threshold levels.
If the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs installed in a LM have different

output power values (for example, a combination of
2.5G SR and 2.5G LR2), be sure to use appropriate
attenuators between when daisy-chaining ports
together.

Figure 6-9
Configuration of the 10G digital test set (one)
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-10
Configuration of the 10G digital test set (two)
Note: If desired, you can change the utilization value to 99%.
Figure 6-11
Configuration of the 10G digital test set (three)
—continued—


Step Action
2 Configure the 100G digital test set as shown in Configuration of the 100G
Digital test set (one), Configuration of the 100G Digital test set (two), and
Configuration of the 100G Digital test set (three).
Figure 6-12
Configuration of the 100G Digital test set (one)
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-13
Configuration of the 100G Digital test set (two)
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-14
Configuration of the 100G Digital test set (three)
receiver ranges in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description (-100).
the pluggable optical module or modules being tested.
4 Clean the digital optical test set leads and all test adapter cables in
accordance with the appropriate procedures in Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices.
CAUTION
—continued—


Step Action
5 Verify test set operation as follows.

d. Remove the loop.
—end—

Procedure 6-9
Testing spare CTMs
Use this procedure to test the spare CTMs.
ATTENTION
The spare CTM mirrors the CTM installed initially and configures itself
automatically to the same software version, Internet Protocol (IP) address,
and other settings. It also assumes a brand that identifies it as belonging to
the 5430 Switch used for testing. If the spare CTM later replaces the
secondary CTM in another 5430 Switch, this does not make any significant
difference.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Follow the testing procedures in System operation tests.

2 While slot testing is continuing for Shelf A, remove the primary CTM (A-CTM)
as described below.
a. Verify that the secondary CTM (C-CTM) is synchronized with the primary
CTM. Indications that synchronization is present are:
On the primary CTM, the green ACT LED lights steadily, and the other
two LEDs are off.
On the secondary CTM, the green ACT LED and MNT LED wink.
b. From the Operations menu in the CLI, reset the primary CTM to switch
the CTM role. The C-CTM becomes the primary CTM.
c. Immediately remove the CTM as follows:
Push the ejectors simultaneously into the open position. Be careful to use
equal pressure on both levers.
Slide the module straight out of the slot, taking care not to twist or tilt the
3 Verify that the test set currently connected to an LM is running error-free.
4 Store the module in an ESD-safe container. This CTM is now the spare CTM
and should be labeled as such.
—continued—


Testing spare CTMs
Step Action
5 Install the CTM that was shipped as spare as follows:

a. Remove the CTM from its anti-static bag:
b. Slowly slide the CTM fully into the slot until the top and bottom ejectors
engage the ejector bracket and begin to rotate.
Be careful to insert the module using the guide rails in a level, straight-
ahead direction.
c. Apply equal pressure to both ejectors and simultaneously push them into
the closed position.
d. Tighten the screws to secure the CTM.
6 Wait approximately 20 minutes for the CTM to complete the boot process and
stabilize.
7 Verify that the red FLT LED on the CTM goes out and that the green ACT LED
is blinking, indicating the secondary mode. If the CTM does not give these
indications after 30 minutes, contact Ciena Technical Support.
8 Record the results of the spares testing on Section P: Spare hardware
inventory and testing.
9 After all the unequipped slots have been tested, make the A-CTM active
again as follows:
a. Log on to the CTM CLI menu using the default UserId and Password
(superuser/superuser1!).
b. Go to the Operations menu and select the option to reset the primary
CTM.
—end—

Procedure 6-10
Use this procedure to test spare Switch Modules (SMs).
ATTENTION
Test spare Switch Modules after the unequipped slots have been tested in
Shelf A.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Identify an SM that is in a primary role as follows:

a. From the Node Manager menu bar, select Go > Inventory.
b. Expand the Equipment tree.
c. In the equipment tree identify an SM that is indicated as being in a
primary role.
2 In Node Manager, prepare the identified primary SM for removal as follows:
a. From the Inventory selection tree, expand the 5430 Switch node view
and select the SM to be removed.
b. From the Details frame, change the Administrative State to Locked
and click Accept.
c. Select Prepare to Unseat Card and click Accept.
3 Remove the SM from the slot as follows:
a. Loosen the two screws securing the SM.
b. Simultaneously move both the ejectors into the open position
(perpendicular to the module faceplate). Be careful to use equal pressure
on the ejectors.
c. Slide the module straight out of the slot, taking care not to twist or tilt the
4 In the Node Manager Inventory screen, verify that a secondary (protection)
SM has become a primary SM.
5 Store the removed SM in an appropriate ESD-safe container. This SM is now
a spare SM and should be labeled as such.
—continued—


Step Action
6 Install the SM that was shipped as spare, as follows:

a. Remove the SM from its anti-static plastic bag.
b. Inspect the module connector block for damage or misalignment. If the
connector block is suspected of having damage, return the module to
Ciena following the instructions in Ciena return material authorization
(RMA) procedure.
c. Slowly slide the module into the designated slot until the top and bottom
ejectors engage the ejector bracket and begin to rotate. Be careful to
insert the module using the guide rails in a level, straight-ahead motion.
d. Place the top and bottom ejectors in their closed positions (parallel to the
faceplate).
e. Tighten the retaining screws to secure the module in place.
7 Verify that the SM is operational by observing that the green ACT LED is lit.
8 Unlock the module as follows:
a. From the Node Manager menu bar, select Go > Inventory.
b. From the Inventory selection tree, expand the 5430 Switch node view
and select the SM.
c. In the Details frame, change the Administrative State to Unlocked and
click Accept.
d. If not cleared, clear the Prepare to Unseat Card check box and click
Accept.
9 Record the results of the spares testing on in Installation data sheets.
—end—

Procedure 6-11
Testing spare Fans
Use this procedure to test spare fans.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Loosen the retaining screws on one fan tray assembly and slide the fan out of
the fan shelf. Set it aside.
The remaining fan tray assemblies fan speed may increase.
2 Slide a spare fan tray assembly into the empty slot.
3 Verify that the spare fan tray assembly begins to operate and that the other
fans returns to normal speed.
4 Remove the spare fan tray assembly from the slot and store it in an
appropriate container.
5 Reinstall the fan tray assembly that was removed initially.
6 Record the results of the spares testing in Installation data sheets.
—end—

Procedure 6-12
Test line modules, SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 and
unequipped LM slots
Overview
This procedure describes the optional procedure for testing line modules
(LMs), SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 (optics) and Unequipped LM Slots. Testing
is accomplished by using a combination of diagnostic loops, cross-connects,
and fiber jumpers to daisy chain the desired quantity of LMs and SFP/SFP+/
XFP/CFP/CFP2 together while monitoring a test set to verify a locked, clean
signal.
ATTENTION
This procedure in its entirety should be used only during turn-up and test or
on non-traffic carrying systems, because this procedure includes optional
tests that remove partial power from the 5400 Switch.
Do not perform this procedure on traffic-carrying systems.
Required tools
• Flashlight
• Insulated screwdrivers (standard flat blade and Phillips)
• Test set
• Optical cleaning kit (containing cleaning sticks authorized to clean LC
connectors) and an optical fiber scope
• Power meter
Prerequisites
observed.


• The user must have Node Manager Connection Point (CP), Termination
Point Provisioner (TP) or Node Manager Troubleshooter (TS) privilege.
• Before performing this procedure current 5400 Switch alarms must be
noted.
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5400 Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating (-310)
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform5400 Configuration - Protection Services
(-320)
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5400 Configuration - Control Plane (-330)
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5400 Fault Management - Module
Replacement (-545)
Procedure
CAUTION
Step Action
Preparing LM for testing

1 At the selected LM slot, remove the blank filler panel (if applicable).
2 Inspect the backplane connector for that slot and verify that no connector pins
are bent. If the 5400 Switch is suspected of having damage, contact Ciena
3 Remove the LM from its ESD-guard anti-static bag.
—continued—


Step Action
ATTENTION
The shelves in the 5400 Switches include fiber management guides that are
color-coded black and gray to match the ejectors of the LMs and CTMs. As
modules are installed, ensure they are oriented so that the color of the
module ejectors matches the adjacent fiber management guide.

misalignment. If damage to the connector block is suspected, return the
module to Ciena following the instructions in Ciena return material
5 Open the ejector levers on the LM.
Preparing ports for testing
6 Remove the optics from the ESD-guard anti-static bag.
7 Install all optics into the LM.
8 Remove the dust caps from the interface connectors port and clean the
optical connectors in accordance with the applicable procedures in Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices (Part Number 009-2003-121).
9 Connect a 6-inch (15-cm) fiber test jumper to each of the transmit optical
interface connectors on the optics.
10 Slide the optics fully into the host LM optical slot, taking care not to pinch the
attached fiber test jumpers.
Verifying output power for the SFP/XFP/CFP
11 Verify that the installed LMs are administratively unlocked as follows:
a. At the Go > Configuring > Ptp screen, expand the equipment tree to
display each shelf and installed module. The ARC State in the Status
field should indicate Alarm Reporting.
b. If the ARC State field indicates Alarm Reporting, proceed with step 12.
c. If the ARC State indicates No Alarm Reporting, select Alarm
Reporting and click Accept. Proceed with step 12.
—continued—


Step Action
ATTENTION
If an installed XFP/SFP is not correctly displayed in the equipment tree, this
indicates that Node Manager does not recognize the module. If the XFP/SFP
is not recognized, perform the following actions:
From the equipment tree, select the incorrectly displayed XFP/SFP.

Remove XFP/SFP.
Click Delete.
Re-install the XFP/SFP into the same host LM optical slot. If Node Manager
still does not recognize the XFP/SFP, install a similar XFP/SFP into the same
LM slot. Contact Ciena Technical Support for assistance if the second XFP/
SFP is not recognized. Refer to Contacting Ciena on the copyright page of
this document for contact information.
12 Observe the LEDs on each installed LM. Verify that the green ACT LED is lit,
indicating that the LM is in operational state.
13 Unlock the XFP/SFP as follows:
a. From the Node Manager equipment tree, select the port (Physical
Termination Point - PTP) to be tested.
b. Select Go > Configuring > Ptp, select the Basic tab, and verify that the
Admin State in the Status field is Unlocked.
If the Status field indicates Unlocked, proceed with step c..
If the Status field indicates Locked, select Unlocked from the Admin State
drop-down menu and click Accept. Proceed with step c.
c. Observe the LEDs on the optics or port. Verify that the green ACT LED
is lit, indicating that the optics or port is in an unlocked state. If the LED
pattern indicates that an optics or port is not unlocked, repeat step a. and
step b. for that optics or port.
14 With the optics or port unlocked, measure the output results on the optical
power test on that optics. Verify that the results are within the acceptable
ranges listed in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description (-100).
15 Record the output power.
If the output power of an optics is not within the acceptable range, clean the
fiber connectors and bulkhead connectors and retest. If the output power is
still not within the acceptable range, return the optics to Ciena Corporation
following the procedures described in Ciena return material authorization
(RMA) procedure.
—continued—


Step Action
16 Lock the port (PTP) in Node Manager as follows:

a. Click Go > Configuring > Ptp, select the Basic tab, select Locked from
the Admin State drop-down menu and click Accept.
b. Observe the LEDs on the XFP/SFP or port. Verify that the yellow MNT
LED is lit, indicating that the XFP/SFP or port is in a locked state.
Preparing the digital test set
CAUTION
threshold levels.
If the SFPs/XFPs/CFPs installed in a LM have different

output power values (for example, a combination of
2.5G SR and 2.5G LR2), be sure to use appropriate
attenuators between when daisy-chaining ports
together.
receiver ranges in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description (-100).
the SFP/XFP being tested.
18 Clean the digital optical test set leads and all test adapter cables (for example,
SC-to-LC, FC-to-LC, and so forth) in accordance with the appropriate
procedures in Standard Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
CAUTION
backplane and module. Use proper installation
practices.
19 Verify test set operation as follows:

d. Remove the loop.
—continued—


Step Action
20 Connect the test leads of the digital optical test set to the fiber test jumpers
attached to the SFP/XFP.
Testing the SFP/XFP on a line module
21 Set up a diagnostic loopback on the SFP/XFP as follows:
a. From the Node Manager menu bar, select Go > Configuring > Ptp.
b. Select Locked from the Admin State drop down menu.
c. Select Reserved for Test from the Control Status drop down menu and
click Accept.
d. Select Facility from the Loopback Type list and type Accept.
After the diagnostic loopback is activated, the optical test setup should match
the illustration in LM test setup with one SFP.
ATTENTION
If required, place an attenuator in series with the test set as shown in LM test
setup with one SFP.
22 Configure the optical test set to generate a BER signal matching the SONET
or SDH environment with time slots mapped that equals the maximum OC-n
or STM-n rate supported by the SFP/XFP or port being tested.
Figure 6-15
LM test setup with one SFP
Switch
Matrix
LM
RX TX
Optical Module
Optical Test Set ‐10dB Port
TX Attenuator RX
(Required)
Facility
Loopback
LM Faceplate 5400‐15005
23 Inject one error into the SFP/XFP and verify that it is returned.
seconds (actual duration may vary according to customer specifications).
—continued—


Step Action

a. Verify that the diagnostic loopback is properly configured.
supported by the SFP/XFP.
interface connectors on the SFP/XFP.
26 Remove the loopback as follows:
a. At the Go > Configuring > Ptp screen, select None from the Loopback
Type list.
b. Click Accept.
27 Reset the test set error counter. Verify that the digital optical test set
connected to the port is no longer locked and is counting BER test errors.
28 Unlock the laser on the SFP/XFP (PTP) as follows:
b. Select None from the Loopback Type drop-down menu.
c. Select None from Control Status drop-down menu and click Accept.
d. Select Unlocked from the Admin State drop-down menu and click
Accept.
The Admin State in the Status field should indicate Unlocked.
29 Observe the LEDs on the SFP/XFP. Verify that the green ACT LED is lit,
indicating that the SFP/XFP is in an unlocked state. If the LED pattern
indicates that an SFP/XFP is not unlocked, repeat step 28 for that SFP/XFP.
Testing 12 XFPs on a line module
30 Remove the XFPs from the ESD-guard anti-static bag.
31 Install 12 XFPs into the LM.
32 Remove the dust caps from the interface connectors port and clean the
optical connectors in accordance with the applicable procedures in Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices (Part Number 009-2003-121).
33 Connect a 6-inch (15-cm) fiber test jumper to each of the transmit optical
interface connectors on the SFPs.
—continued—


Step Action
34 Slide the XFPs fully into the host LM optical slot, taking care not to pinch the
attached fiber test jumpers.
35 Connect the Tx jumper from XFP 1 to the Rx port of XFP 2 and Tx jumper of
XFP 2 to the RX port of XFP 3 and so forth, for the 11 Tx jumpers (LM test
setup (testing all 12 XFPs)).
Figure 6-16
LM test setup (testing all 12 XFPs)
36 Connect the Tx jumper from XFP 12 to the test set RX port.

37 Connect the Rx jumper from XFP 1 to the test set TX port.
38 Configure the optical test set to generate a BER signal matching the SONET
or SDH environment with time slots mapped that equal the maximum OC-n
or STM-n rate supported by the XFP or port being tested.
39 Inject one error into the XFP and verify that it is returned.
—continued—


Step Action
seconds (actual duration may vary according to customer specifications).
supported by the XFP.
Testing unequipped line module slots
If the final customer configuration includes unequipped line module slots,
these slots should be tested during the system operation testing process. The
following test procedure uses the first LM that is completely tested in
accordance with the procedures starting on Preparing ports for testing.
To test unequipped LM slots, the following steps are performed.
42 Using Node Manager, drop all diagnostic loopbacks and cross connects that
were set up on the tested LM during the test process.
43 Remove the LM as follows:
b. Lock the LM lasers on the XFP from the Admin State drop-down menu.
c. In the Inventory screen, select Prepare to Unseat Card and click
Accept.
d. If required, loosen the retaining screws and use the ejector levers to
unseat the module. Pull the module out of the system slot.
44 Remove the blank module filler panel (if installed) from the unequipped slot
to be tested.
45 Install the LM in the slot to be tested by sliding the LM fully into the slot and
place the ejectors in the closed position (parallel to the faceplate).
—continued—


Step Action
46 Using any or all processes starting in Preparing ports for testing configure
necessary Physical Termination Points (PTPs), Connection Termination
Points (CTPs), cross connects, and diagnostic loopbacks on the SFPs in the
LM slot being tested.
47 Verify that the digital optical test set is locked and running an error-free Bit
Error Rate (BER) test for a minimum of 15 minutes. (The actual duration may
vary according to customer specifications.)
49 Using Node Manager screens, perform the following actions in the order
presented:
a. At the Go > Configuring > Ptp screen, select None from the Loopback
Type list.
b. At the Go > Provisioning > Cross Connect screen, select the cross
c. Delete all CTP entries.
d. Lock all PTPs created for the LM that was tested.
50 Remove all fiber optic test jumpers (including test leads) for the LM. Remove
the LM from the tested slot.
51 In Node Manager, delete the removed LM from the system database.
ATTENTION
Each time an LM is removed from a spare slot after the slot testing is
completed, that LM must be deleted from the Node Manager database.
52 Re-install the blank module filler panel (if applicable) removed in step 44.
53 Repeat step 44 through step 52 for each LM slot until all unused slots have
been tested.
54 Re-install the LM in the original system slot from which it was removed.
—end—

Procedure 6-13
Overview
This procedure describes how to add a new pluggable optic, replace a
defective pluggable optic, replace a defective pluggable optic with a different
type transceiver, and permanently remove a pluggable optic.
• To install a new pluggable optic into an empty slot, step 14 through step
23 are performed.
ATTENTION
The 5430 Switch with Gen1 PDUs do not support Tunable SFP+ or
10GBase-ZR SFP+ in the OSLM-50-10G. If either SFP+ is installed in a
5430 Switch with Gen1 PDUs then the SFP+ is failed and laser disabled.
• To replace a defective pluggable optic, step 1 through step 11 and step 14

through step 23 are performed.
• To replace a defective pluggable optic with a different type, step 1 through
step 23 are performed.
• To permanently remove a pluggable optic, step 1 through step 13 are
performed.
Required tools
ATTENTION
If the connector type on a replacement optic does not match the connector
type of the original optic and the installed site fiber cables, fiber pigtail cables
and adapters will be necessary as noted in the Appendix.
Prerequisites
• The user must follow proper module-handling procedures. When handling,
observed.
– Store modules in ESD protective packaging when they are not


• Before performing this procedure, the following tasks must be performed:
– Line-side alarms or line-side span switch activity on the adjacent
nodes must be cleared.
– Current 5400 Switch alarms must be noted.
– When replacing a module, the user must ensure that the
replacement module is available and that the part number and
revision level are correct.
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description (-100)
Procedure
CAUTION
ATTENTION
Modules can be hot-swapped; 5430 power does not need to be removed.
Lock modules prior to removal and unlock modules after installation. If
required, refer to Configuration - Provisioning and Operating (-310).
Step Action
Removing an optic
1 Establish a Node Manager session with the 5400 Switch.
2 If the optic is carrying traffic, verify traffic has been groomed away from the
optic to be removed.
3 From Node Manager session and click Go > Inventory.
desired optic is displayed and select the optic.
—continued—


Step Action

c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select No Alarm Reporting from
the ARC State drop-down menu to disable equipment alarms.
d. Click Accept.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Locked from the Admin
d. Click Accept.
State change to OFF.
6 Identify each fiber connected to the optic. Tag the fibers with the appropriate
optic slot or port and identify Tx and Rx. Tag the optic with the appropriate
optic slot.
ATTENTION
Before disconnecting any fiber cables, observe the fiber cable routing and
connections. Ensure that proper routing and connections are maintained
when the optic is reinstalled or a new optic is installed.
Pay attention to the installation of strain relief and fiber boots that may be
attached to the fibers. These devices will need to be reinstalled upon
replacement of the optic interface.
7 Disconnect the fibers from the optic (SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 optics

(typical)) to be removed and move the disconnected fibers out of the way.
8 If required move other fiber cables out of the way as follows:
a. At the curved fiber support above or below the LM where the optic is
installed, identify the fiber coming from the optic that is not being
removed.
b. Increase the slack in the identified fiber by slipping the fiber over the lip
and off its fiber support; move the fiber to the next support position.
9 Move the fiber to the side, and attach it to the neighboring fiber using a loop
of Velcro. Ensure that the moved fiber is not in the path of the optic to be
removed.
10 Slide the optic out of the LM in a level straight-backward motion.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-17
SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP/CFP2 optics (typical)
ATTENTION
If replacing with a different transceiver or permanently removing the transceiver,
delete the optic as described in step 12, before installing the replacement optic.
If the user does not delete the optic, a replaceable unit mismatch alarm will
be raised.
To install a new or replacement optic proceed to step 14.
—continued—


Step Action
11 Place dust covers on the fiber connectors, and place the optic in an ESD-
guard anti-static bag.
Deleting an optic
12 Click Go > Inventory.
removed optic is displayed and select the optic.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Delete.
d. If transceiver is to be permanently removed, install a transceiver dust
cover in the LM slot and end this procedure.
13 To install a optic proceed to step 14, otherwise end this procedure.
Installing an optic
CAUTION
Risk of damage to modules
Ensure that the power levels do not exceed
specifications when changing among very short reach,
short reach, medium reach, and long reach optics.
Refer to Optical specifications for the maximum input
power levels for each optic type.
ATTENTION
When replacing a module, ensure that the replacement module part number
and revision level are correct. If the optic is the same optic removed, ensure
that the optic is installed in the slot identified and tagged in step 6. Ensure
that proper routing and connections are maintained when the optic is
reinstalled or a new optic is installed.
Step Action
14 Remove the optic from its ESD-guard anti-static bag.

15 Remove the dust caps and clean all optical connections in accordance with
Ciena Standard Cleaning and Equipment Safety Practices.
16 Install the optic in the desired slot.
17 Connect the previously identified and tagged fiber cables to the optic
connectors or fiber pigtail connectors (Fiber benders/pigtail connectors).
—continued—


Step Action
18 Using the Node Manager session, unlock the optic as follows:

c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Alarm Reporting from the
ARC State drop-down menu to enable equipment alarms.
d. Click Accept.
c. In the Status field of the Details frame, select Unlocked from the Admin
d. Click Accept.
Figure 6-18
Fiber benders/pigtail connectors
—continued—


Step Action
State change to ON.
21 Verify that Serial #, Card Type, CLEI, Asmb. Part #, Mfg. Date, Model ID,
Ext. Model ID, and ECI fields contain the appropriate information.
If the fields are empty or do not contain the appropriate information, proceed
to the next step.
22 At the 5400 Switch, verify the following LED indications for the newly installed
optics:
a. Green ACTIVE LED is lit.
b. MAINT LED is off.
c. LINE LED is off.
d. FAIL LED is off.
23 If the fields are empty or do not contain the appropriate information or if the
optic is not operational, refer to Fault Management - Alarm Clearing (-543)
and/or contact the next level of support.
ATTENTION
Verify that the Node Manager application does not display a UEQ alarm for
the optic. If a UEQ alarm is displayed, clear the alarm by administratively
locking and unlocking the optic.
Check PM and line status to ensure that the line is ready for traffic. Resolve
any issues prior to moving traffic onto the line.
—end—

Procedure 6-14
This procedure describes how to test the 5400 Switch light emitting diodes
(LEDs).
Required tools
Prerequisites
• Not applicable
Procedure
CAUTION
Step Action
1 At the front of the 5400 Switch, open the front access doors.
2 Observe the 5400 Switch LEDs presently lit on each CTM, SM, SFP/XFP/
CFP and LM.
3 On the 5430 Switch, press and hold for three seconds, the ACO/LED switch
on the display module or on the 5410 Switch, press and hold for three
seconds the ACO switch on the primary CTM.
ATTENTION
For the 5430 Switch display panel, the LED test sequence toggles the PDU
display module bi-color LEDs Power A, Power B, and power feed LEDs 2
through 7 to switch between red and green every second. LEDs 1 and 8
remain Green (on both Power A and Power B) and do not flash red.
For the 5410 Switch PDUs, PDU feed LEDs 1 through 3 switch between red
and green every second.
SFP/XFP/CFP port tricolor LEDs cycle red, green and yellow.
CTM ES1/ES2/ES3/ES4 LINK/ACT LEDs are not lit during the LED test.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Verify that all system LEDs on the 5430 Switch display panel, 5410 Switch
PDUs, fan assemblies, CTMs, SMs, SFP/XFPs/CFPs, and LMs are lit.
5 If required, record the measured results on Section M: LM LED status and
functional test.
After five minutes all LED status returns to normal.
6 If required, refer to Verifying power feed LEDs with individual fuses removed
to test PDU power feeds.
7 If any system LED on the 5430 Switch PDU fails to light, replace the PDU
display module.
8 If any system LED on a CTM fails to light, replace the CTM.
9 If any system LED on an SM fails to light, replace the SM.
10 If any system LED on a SFP/XFP fails to light, replace the SFP/XFP.
11 If any system LED on an LM fails to light, replace the LM.
12 If any system LED on a fan unit fails to light, replace the fan assembly.
—end—

Procedure 6-15
Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure
Overview
This procedure describes how to obtain a Ciena Return Material Authorization
(RMA) number and how to return a defective item to Ciena.
Required tools
• Anti-static bag or anti-static box
Prerequisites
• Collect hardware related alarm additional text information.
observed.
• An anti-static bag or box must be available for the removed module.
• None

Procedure
CAUTION
ATTENTION
All returned equipment must have a Ciena RMA number. Ciena is not
responsible for any item returned without this identifier.
Step Action
1 Go to the Ciena Support website http://www.ciena.com/support/ and have the

following information available:
a. Serial Number
b. Site ID (If applicable)
c. PO Number (If applicable)
d. Customer Contact
e. Contact Phone Number
f. Problem Description
— What was the nature of the failure?
— How was the failure detected/verified?
— Approximately how long was the module running prior to failure?
ATTENTION
Ciena assigns an RMA number, which is used to track the defective item. The
replacement item will be shipped to the customer, based upon the terms of
the Customer Contract for Warranty (repair or replace).
2 After the replacement item has been unpacked and installed, reuse the
shipping container, packing materials, and optical dust caps to return the
defective item to Ciena.
3 Affix the preprinted air bill to the shipping container.
4 Arrange for the shipper to collect the shipping container.
—end—

Procedure 6-16
Overview
This procedure describes how to use the 5430 Switch fiber management tool.
The fiber management tool can be used during channel adds and during
xSLM remove and replace procedures.
Required tools
• 5400 Switch Node Manager software
Prerequisites
• The user must be trained in proper module handling procedures. When
handling, installing, or removing modules, the following precautions must
be observed.
• The user must be familiar with 5400 Switch Node Manager software.
– Current 5400 Switch alarms must be noted.
• 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description (-100)

Procedure
CAUTION
Step Action
Installing the fiber management tool

1 At the rear of the 5430 Switch, loosen thumb screw (A) at the top of the fiber
management tool (Fiber management tool), and remove fiber management
tool base and slider (two pieces). Separate the two pieces.
Figure 6-19
Fiber management tool
2 At the front of the 5430 Switch, locate fiber management tool base
attachment points (A, B) as shown in Fiber management tool base
attachment points.
3 Insert base pin at attachment point B, then position base and tighten thumb
screw at attachment point A.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 6-20
Fiber management tool base attachment points
4 Verify base is positioned and secured to chassis as shown in Fiber

management tool base.
Figure 6-21
Fiber management tool base
—continued—


Step Action
5 Position the fiber management tool slider in base and align slider groves with
base rails as shown in Slider position.
Figure 6-22
Slider position
6 Holding the tool slider at an angle to avoid installed fibers, position organizer
slider next to the desired xSLM slot.
7 If applicable remove traffic/switch traffic to protect on xSLM to be removed, in
accordance with local guidelines.
8 For xSLM remove and replace procedures, remove fibers from xSLM to be
removed and install fiber in corresponding location on tool/organizer slider.
After xSLM is replaced, remove fibers from the fiber management tool and
install on the replaced xSLM.
9 For channel adds, install the new xSLM and move fibers from the fiber
management tool and install on the new xSLM.
10 Restore traffic or add traffic in accordance with local guidelines.
11 Remove fiber management tool and replace at the rear of the 5430 Switch.
12 Secure the fiber management tool by tightening the thumb screw (A) at the
top of the fiber management tool.
—end—

Procedure 6-17
Overview
This procedure describes how to decommission a 5430 Switch and remove it
from its installed location.
Required tools
Prerequisites
observed.
– ESD-protective packaging must be available for all modules
removed from the 5430 Switch.
– Notify the Network Operations Center (NOC) that a Network
Element (NE) is being removed from the network and should
request permission to begin the procedure.
– All traffic is removed from the 5430 Switch.
• An approved shipping crate with hardware, packing materials, and dolly
assemblies must be available for the 5430 Switch rack.
5430 Switch Uncrating Guide (PN 009-2009-079)
Fault Management - Module Replacement (-545):
• Removing and installing a 5430 Switch PDU

• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch fan assembly
• Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM
• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch switch module

• Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP

• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch line module
• Removing and installing a 5430 Switch display module
• Removing and installing a 5430 switch I/O module
• Handling circuit packs properly
Procedure
CAUTION
CAUTION
Risk of damage to PDU filter circuitry
The PDU contains filter circuitry that controls the end-rush
current when power is applied or removed. Allow 30 seconds
between power removal and re-application to the PDU to allow
the end-rush current circuitry to function properly.
DANGER
Risk of personal injury
Negative 48 volts DC or 120/240 volts AC is present in this
equipment, and 120/240 volts AC is present in some of the test
equipment used with this equipment. Contact can cause
personal injury. Take appropriate safety precautions.
CAUTION
Performance of this procedure will cause traffic disruption if
traffic has not been removed in accordance with local
guidelines. This instruction is intended as a general guide only,
has not been tested for all possible applications or
configurations, and may not be complete or accurate for some
situations.
This is a single removal procedure.
—continued—


Preparation
Step Action
1 Contact the NOC and verify that all traffic has been removed from the 5430
Switch.
2 Power down the 5430 Switch.
3 Note the routing of all optical cables connected to the 5430 modules. Label
all cables as required.
Disconnect 5430 Switch Cabling
ATTENTION
As required, refer to the 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5430 Switch Hardware
Installation Manual (-201.1) for additional details.
4 On the faceplate of the I/O panel module, locate the ALARM port then tag and
remove alarm output cable.
5 Tag and remove BITS cabling.
6 Tag and remove Ethernet DCN cabling.
Remove 5430 Circuit Packs
ATTENTION
Refer to Proper module handling as required to perform the following.
7 Perform the “Removing, deleting or installing an pluggable optic” procedure

to remove, tag, and package all optical cables and optics.
8 Perform the 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module
Replacement (-545) “Removing and installing a 5400 Switch line module”
procedure to remove and package all line modules.
Replacement (-545) “Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM” procedure to
remove and package CTMs.
Replacement (-545) “Removing and installing a 5400 Switch switch module”
procedure to remove and package all switch modules.
—continued—


Step Action
Disconnect Power and Ground
ATTENTION
Refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5430 Switch Hardware Installation
Manual (-201.1) as required to perform the following.
11 At the Battery Distribution Fuse Bay (BDFB), ensure that the circuit breakers
that supply -48 VDC power to the 5430 Switch are opened and tagged Out of
Service.
12 At the rear of the 5430 Switch, tag all power cables.
13 Remove all power cables.
14 The 5430 Switch rack has ground attachment points on the front of the rack
at the top left (A-Side), top center, and top right (B-Side) sides. Remove all
facility ground cables.
Remove PDU, Fan Assemblies, and Display Module
ATTENTION
Refer to Proper module handling procedure as required to perform the
following. As required, refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5430 Switch
Hardware Installation Manual (-201.1) to perform the following.
15 At the rear of the 5430 Switch, remove the upper fan air exhaust deflector if
required.
16 Remove and package the 5430 Switch PDU-A bottom power harness.
17 Remove and package the 5430 Switch PDU-B top power harness.
18 At the PDU-A side of the 5430 Switch, remove and package the A-Side
transient protector.
19 At the PDU-B side of the 5430 Switch, remove and package the B-Side
transient protector.
ATTENTION
Refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5400 Fault Management - Module
Replacement (-545) procedure as required to perform the following.
20 Perform the “Removing and installing a 5430 switch I/O module” procedure to
remove and package the I/O module.
21 Perform the “Removing and installing a 5430 Switch PDU” procedure to
remove and package the PDUs.
—continued—


Step Action
22 Perform the “Removing and installing a 5400 Switch fan assembly” procedure
to remove and package all fan assemblies.
23 Perform the “Removing and installing a 5430 Switch display module”
procedure to remove and package the display module.
Remove Accessory Equipment
ATTENTION
Refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform5430 Switch Hardware Installation
Manual (-201.1) as required to perform the following.
24 If Interbay Management Panels (IMPs) are installed for fiber management,

disconnect the panels from the 5430 Switch.
25 Lockout, tag and remove any AC power connections.
Detach the Rack from the Floor and Overhead Bracing
ATTENTION
As required, refer to 5430 Switch Hardware Installation Manual (-201.1) to
perform the following.
26 Unbolt the 5430 rack from the floor.

27 If the rack is attached to overhead bracing, remove the overhead auxiliary
framing.
Prepare the 5430 Switch for crating
ATTENTION
28 Carefully tilt the rack to one side and attach one dolly to the 5430 Switch.
29 Carefully tilt the rack toward the side with the dolly in place and attach the
second dolly.
Crate the 5430 Switch
ATTENTION
30 Carefully tilt the rack to one side and attach one dolly to the 5430 Switch.
—continued—


Step Action
31 Carefully tilt the rack toward the side with the dolly in place and attach the
second dolly.
32 Refer to the 5430 Uncrating Guide to load the 5430 Switch into the crate.
Note that the PDU display panel is typically shipped with the 5430 Switch
rack/chassis.
—end—


7-1
Installation data sheets 7-
This appendix contains the following data sheets and test forms that can be
used during the installation of the Ciena® 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5430
Switch:
• Section A: Site Information and pre-test check list
• Section B: 5430 Switch installation discrepancy list
• Section C: Ground tests
• Section D: A/B RTN terminal isolation tests
• Section E: A/B -48V terminal isolation tests
• Section F: PDU-A and PDU-B power verification
• Section G: CTM configuration parameters
• Section H: SONET BITS cable test
• Section I: SDH SSU cable test
• Section J: Power feed LED status
• Section K: Software version
• Section L: Fan alarm generation
• Section M: LM LED status and functional test
• Section N: Module LED status and redundancy tests
• Section O: LED test
• Section P: Spare hardware inventory and testing

7-2 Installation data sheets
Section A: Site Information and pre-test check list

Site information
Customer:
Site:
Date:
Route:
Span Name:
System:
Bay Position:
Onsite Supervisor:
Ciena Lead Engineer:
Ciena Test Engineer:
Ciena Test Engineer:
Pre-test check Y/N Corrected
Equipment Inventoried
Area Clean
Rack(s) Numbered
Power and Misc. Cabling
BDFB Breakers Installed
PDU Fuses Available
Fiber Routed
Fiber Labels on Both Ends
Fiber Channel Installed
Blank Panel Installed
ATTENTION
Explain N responses on attached discrepancy sheet (Section B: 5430 Switch
installation discrepancy list). Record corrective action taken.

Installation data sheets 7-3
Section B: 5430 Switch installation discrepancy list

Item Discrepancy O=Open Responsibility
number C=Closed

Section C: Ground tests

From To Value 
PDU Tray Rack Ground
Chassis Rack Ground
Facility Ground Point (System Ground Source) Rack Ground
Section D: A/B RTN terminal isolation tests

From To Value To Value To Value To Value
Term. Term. k Term. k Term. k Term. k
PDU-A
1 RTN 2 RTN 3 RTN 4 RTN 5 RTN
6 RTN 7 RTN 8 RTN 9 RTN
10 RTN
8 RTN 9 RTN 10 RTN
9 RTN 10 RTN
10 RTN
8 RTN 9 RTN 10 RTN
9 RTN 10 RTN
PDU-B
10 RTN


8 RTN 9 RTN 10 RTN
9 RTN 10 RTN
10 RTN
8 RTN 9 RTN 10 RTN
9 RTN 10 RTN

Section E: A/B -48V terminal isolation tests

PDU-A
1 -48V 2 -48V 3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V
6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V
10 -48V
2 -48V 3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V
7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V
8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V
9 -48V 10 -48V
5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V
10 -48V
6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
9 -48V 10 -48V
PDU-B
1 -48V 2 -48V 3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V
6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V
10 -48V
2 -48V 3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V
7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
3 -48V 4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V
8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
4 -48V 5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V
9 -48V 10 -48V


5 -48V 6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V
10 -48V
6 -48V 7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
7 -48V 8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
8 -48V 9 -48V 10 -48V
9 -48V 10 -48V

Section F: PDU-A and PDU-B power verification

Black lead Red lead Value Black lead Red lead Value
PDU-A PDU-B
1 RTN 1 -48V 1 RTN 1 -48V
2 RTN 2 -48V 2 RTN 2 -48V
3 RTN 3 -48V 3 RTN 3 -48V
4 RTN 4 -48V 4 RTN 4 -48V
5 RTN 5 -48V 5 RTN 5 -48V
6 RTN 6 -48V 6 RTN 6 -48V
7 RTN 7 -48V 7 RTN 7 -48V
8 RTN 8 -48V 8 RTN 8 -48V
9 RTN 9 -48V 9 RTN 9 -48V
10 RTN 10 -48V 10 RTN 10 -48V
Section G: CTM configuration parameters

Parameter Value
Node Name:
Main Management IP address:
Internal Network Base address
Management IP address netmask:
IP gateway address:
FTP server IP address:
DCN IP address netmask:
CTM Main1 DCN IP address:
CTM Aux1 DCN IP address:
CTM Main2 DCN IP address:
CTM Aux2 DCN IP address:
Node Address:
CORBA Server Port Number:
TL1 Module Port Number:

Parameter Value
HTTP Port Number:
DCN Mode
Node Manager Software Load
Network Element Software Load/Build
Section H: SONET BITS cable test

Note: Section G should only be completed for terminals equipped with the SONET I/O circuit pack.
BITS Cable Test () Expected () Measured
BITS 1 Blue wire end to end 0
White wire end to end 0
Blue wire to Shield wire Open (>10M)
White wire to Shield wire Open (>10M)
BITS 2 Blue wire end to end 0
White wire end to end 0
Blue wire to Shield wire Open (>10M)
White wire to Shield wire Open (>10M)
Section I: SDH SSU cable test

Note: Note: Section H should only be completed for terminals equipped with the SDH I/O circuit pack.
Section L: SSU BNC Connector Test () Expected () Measured
J2 (BITS 2 RX) center conductor to outer shell 80 to 100
J2 (BITS 2 RX) outer shell to chassis ground  10 M (open)
J3 (BITS 1 RX) outer shell to chassis ground  10 M (open)
J3 (BITS 1 RX) center conductor to outer shell 80 to 10
J6 (BITS 2 TX) center conductor to outer shell  10 M (open)
J6 (BITS 2 TX) outer shell to chassis ground 1
J7 (BITS 1 TX) center conductor to outer shell  10 M (open)
J7 (BITS 1 TX) outer shell to chassis ground 1

Section J: Power feed LED status

Power feed LED status Power A LED Major Alarm LED
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

removed replaced removed replaced removed replaced
Fuse A1
Fuse A2
Fuse A3
Fuse A4
Fuse A5
Fuse A6
Fuse A7
Fuse A8
Fuse A9
Fuse A10
Fuse B1
Fuse B2
Fuse B3
Fuse B4
Fuse B5
Fuse B6
Fuse B7
Fuse B8
Fuse B9
Fuse B10

Section K: Software version

Software version
Section L: Fan alarm generation

Fan Alarm generation Y/N
Fan Tray1: CFUA-1 through CFUA-5 Major (Replaceable Unit Missing)
Fan Tray1: CFUB-1 through CFUB-5 Major (Replaceable Unit Missing)
Other Alarms noted (Specify which fan):
Ciena Tester Signature and Date: ......................................................................................................

Customer Representative Signature and Date: ....................................................................................

Section M: LM LED status and functional test

Module Slot LED Port Normal Module/ Slot LED Port Normal
/Port status output signal Port status output signal
power flow power flow
level level
LM A-1 A-1 LM A-1 A-1
Port A-1-1 Port A-1-26

level level
LM A-2 A-2 LM A-2 A-2
LM A-3 A-3 LM A-3 A-3

level level
LM A-4 A-4 LM A-4 A-4

level level
LM A-5 A-5 LM A-5 A-5

level level
LM A-6 A-6 LM A-6 A-6

level level
LM A-7 A-7 LM A-7 A-7

level level
LM A-8 A-8 LM A-8 A-8

level level
LM A-9 A-9 LM A-9 A-9

level level
LM A-10 A-10 LM A-10 A-10

level level
LM A-11 A-11 LM A-11 A-11

level level
LM A-12 A-12 LM A-12 A-12

level level
LM A-1 A-1 LM A-1 A-1

level level
LM A-14 A-14 LM A-14 A-14

level level
LM A-15 A-15 LM A-15 A-15

level level
LM C-1 C-1 LM C-1 C-1
Port C-1-1 Port C-1-26

level level
LM C-2 C-2 LM C-2 C-2

level level
LM C-3 C-3 LM C-3 C-3

level level
LM C-4 C-4 LM C-4 C-4

level level
LM C-5 C-5 LM C-5 C-5

level level
LM C-6 C-6 LM C-6 C-6

level level
LM C-7 C-7 LM C-7 C-7

level level
LM C-8 C-8 LM C-8 C-8

level level
LM C-9 C-9 LM C-9 C-9

level level
LM C-10 C-10 LM C-10 C-10

level level
LM C-11 C-11 LM C-11 C-11

level level
LM C-12 C-12 LM C-12 C-12

level level
LM C-1 C-1 LM C-1 C-1

level level
LM C-14 C-14 LM C-14 C-14
LM C-15 C-15 LM C-15 C-15

level level

Section N: Module LED status and redundancy tests

Module Slot Module LED status Redundancy checks
CFUA-1 CFUA-1 N/A
CFUA-2 CFUA-2 N/A
CFUA-3 CFUA-3 N/A
CFUA-4 CFUA-4 N/A
CFUA-5 CFUA-5 N/A
CFUB-1 CFUB-1 N/A
CFUB-2 CFUB-2 N/A
CFUB-3 CFUB-3 N/A
CFUB-4 CFUB-4 N/A
CFUB-5 CFUB-5 N/A
CB/Fuse 1 PDU A
CB/Fuse 2 PDU A
CB/Fuse 3 PDU A
CB/Fuse 4 PDU A
CB/Fuse 5 PDU A
CB/Fuse 6 PDU A
CB/Fuse 7 PDU A
CB/Fuse 8 PDU A
CB/Fuse 9 PDU A
CB/Fuse 10 PDU A
CB/Fuse 1 PDU B
CB/Fuse 2 PDU B
CB/Fuse 3 PDU B
CB/Fuse 4 PDU B
CB/Fuse 5 PDU B
CB/Fuse 6 PDU B
CB/Fuse 7 PDU B
CB/Fuse 8 PDU B

CB/Fuse 9 PDU B
CB/Fuse 10 PDU B
CTM A A-CTM
CTM B C-CTM
SM B-1
SM B-2
SM B-3
SM B-4
SM B-5
SM B-6
SM B-7
SM B-8
SM B-9
Note: Indicate either Pass or Fail in the appropriate field for LED Status or Redundancy Checks
Section O: LED test

LED Test Y/N
All LEDs lit

Section P: Spare hardware inventory and testing

Module type Part number Hardware Serial number Test Date
revision result
Fan Tray
Assembly
CFUA
Fan Tray
Assembly
CFUB
CTM
CTM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
TSLM
TSLM
TSLM
OSLM
OSLM
OSLM

Module type Part number Hardware Serial number Test Date

revision result
SFP/XFP/CFP
SFP/XFP/CFP
SFP/XFP/CFP
SFP/XFP/CFP
SFP/XFP/CFP
Air Filter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

8-1
Proper module handling 8-
This chapter describes the proper module handling procedures for the 5400
switch. In addition, this appendix provides the procedures to use when
removing a module from or inserting a module into an ESD-guard anti-static
bag. Improper handling or added pressure to sensitive module components
can have the following consequences:
• A damaged board that does not function properly when the unit is in
operational use
• A misdiagnosed failure analysis report for a returned (RMA) unit
Proper handling prevents such damage to the unit.
This appendix contains the following information and procedures:

• Required Tools
• Prerequisites
• Reference Documents
• , Handling and storing modules
• , Removing a module from an anti-static bag
• , Inserting a module into an anti-static bag
• , Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Circuit Packs during Installation
Required Tools
The following are required for all circuit pack removals and installations:
• anti-static bag or anti-static box

8-2 Proper module handling
Prerequisites
observed.
— Ensure modules are stored in ESD-protective packaging when not
— Do not stack modules on or against each other.
— Pick up modules by the front handle, and do not touch components on
circuit board.
• An anti-static bag or box must be available for the removed module.
Reference Documents
• 5430 Hardware Installation (-201.1)
• 5410 Hardware Installation (-201.2)
• Administration and Security (-301)

Proper module handling 8-3
Procedure 8-1
Handling and storing modules
Use this procedure to handle and store modules.
CAUTION
All modules must be fully seated and latched into the chassis.
If modules need to be removed and cannot be replaced with
another module, replace with the appropriate blank module.
Any module left incompletely seated (or partially removed) may

cause the system to become susceptible to Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) effects.
Devices containing integrated circuits can be damaged by static electricity that

builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The effect of Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) damage may be immediate failure or it may manifest itself
as a latent failure affecting the reliability of the equipment.
Observe the following precautions to avoid static charges and discharges:

• Assume that all modules contain solid state electronic components that
can be damaged by ESD.
• When handling modules (for example, storing, installing, or removing),
always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap and stand on a
grounded, static-dissipating floor mat.
• Handle all modules by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom
outermost edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector
pins.
• If possible, do not remove modules from anti-static packaging until they
are ready for use.
• If possible, open all module packaging at a static-safe work station using
properly grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats.
• Always store and transport modules in static-safe packaging.
• When removing modules from an enclosure, immediately place them in
static-safe packages. Do not leave modules partially installed in the shelf
slot.
—continued—


Handling and storing modules
To avoid physical damage to modules, observe the following precautions:

• Ensure that the backplane protective covers or caps are removed from the
modules before installing them in equipment shelves.
• Do not stack modules directly on or against each other.
• Store all modules in the original protective packaging container. Do not
stack modules without the use of the original protective packaging
containers. Do not leave modules partially installed in the shelf slot.
—end—

Procedure 8-2
Removing a module from an anti-static bag
Use this procedure to remove a module from an anti-static bag.
CAUTION
Handle the module only from the front faceplate side. Never
handle the module from the backplane side.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Wearing an ESD-guard wrist strap, open the ESD-guard anti-static bag.

2 Holding the front faceplate, carefully slide the module from the anti-static bag.
3 Hold the module faceplate or top/bottom rails only.
ATTENTION
If the bag is not large enough to rotate the module, place one hand under the
pan and carefully remove the module from the bag until the faceplate can be
grabbed. This should be done over a flat surface because there is a
possibility of dropping the module.
Never pull the module out of the bag by applying pressure to the pan and the
component boards (Figure 8-1 on page 8-6). Such handling can cause
damage to certain boards that do not have added stiffeners to support such
pressure.
To prevent damage to module, always handle the module by the faceplate

side.
Figure 8-1
Improper module handling
—end—

Procedure 8-3
Inserting a module into an anti-static bag
Use this procedure to insert a module into an anti-static bag.
CAUTION
Handle the module only from the front faceplate side. Never
handle the module from the backplane side.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Wearing an ESD-guard wrist strap, follow the appropriate Module

Replacement (-545) procedure to remove the circuit pack from the system.
2 Using the ejectors, carefully slide the module out of the slot.
3 Holding the front faceplate, carefully slide the module into the anti static bag
(Inserting a module into an anti-static bag).
4 Hold the module faceplate or top/bottom rails only.
Note: Do not insert the module faceplate-first into the anti-static bag.
Figure 8-2
Inserting a module into an anti-static bag
5 Perform the required Return Material Authorization (RMA) procedure in

accordance with Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure.
—end—

Procedure 8-4
Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Circuit Packs during
Installation
Use this procedure to handle SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and circuit packs during
installation.
Procedure
Step Action
Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs
SFPs/XFPs (SFP in box/packaging and XFP in box/packaging) are shipped in
optic boxes.
ATTENTION
Take extra care when connecting the fiber cables to an optic.
Figure 8-3
SFP in box/packaging
—continued—


Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Circuit Packs during Installation
Step Action
Figure 8-4
XFP in box/packaging
Handling circuit packs

1 Follow the appropriate Service Manual procedure to install the circuit pack in
the 5400 Switch:
• Removing and Installing a Control and Timing Module
• Removing and Installing a Switch Module
• Removing and Installing an Optical Module
• Removing and Installing a Line Module
2 When handling circuit packs during installation, the following guidelines

apply:
a. Inspect the module connector block for damage or misalignment. Do this
by visually inspecting each of the connector blocks to verify that they are
properly seated and flush on the Printed Circuit Board (PCB).
b. As a second inspection method, look at the top of all the blocks; they
should appear planar and horizontally aligned. If any of the individual
blocks appear to be mis-seated or out-of-alignment, place the module
back into the ESD-guard anti static bag and return in accordance with
Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure.
—continued—


Handling SFPs/XFPs/CFPs and Circuit Packs during Installation
Step Action
3 Check slot backplane connector and verify no bent pins are present. If the
backplane connector is suspected of having damage, contact Ciena
Correct Connector Block Alignment Planar View (TSLM shown) and Correct
Connector Block Alignment Planar Top View (TSLM shown) show the correct
connector block alignment of a line module.
Figure 8-5
Correct Connector Block Alignment Planar View (TSLM shown)
Figure 8-6
Correct Connector Block Alignment Planar Top View (TSLM shown)
4 Inspect the module faceplate mounting screws that secure the module to the
chassis to ensure that screws are not bent and that threads are not crossed.
—end—


9-1
Optical specifications 9-
Overview
The tables in this section list the 5400 Switch transceiver specifications:
<2.7G SFPs
• B-700-1036-00x OPT-SR1/OPT-LX transceiver specifications on page 9-4
• B-730-0001-00x OPT-IR1 transceiver specifications on page 9-6
• 160-9011-90x OPT-LR-1 transceiver specifications on page 9-7
• 160-9012-90x OPT-LR-2 Multi-rate transceiver specifications on page 9-8
• B-700-1016-001 GigE 1000Base-SX transceiver specifications on page
9-9
• B-700-1016-002 GigE 1000Base-LX transceiver specifications on page
9-11
• 162-0093-900 GigE 1000Base-ZX transceiver specifications on page 9-13
• B-730-0004-001 GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T
specifications on page 9-15
• B-700-1035-00x GE 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM SFP specifications on
page 9-16
• B-730-0006-0xx Multi-rate 15xx.yy nm SFP specifications on page 9-18
10G SFP+
• 160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10km SFP+
• 160-9104-900 10GBASE-ER/FC1200, 1550nm, 40km, SFP+
• 160-9105-900 10GBASE-ZR, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ specifications on
page 9-24
• 160-9201-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1565.50 nm Tunable, 50GHz,
Type 1 DWDM SFP+ specifications on page 9-26
• 160-9204-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 40 km SFP+

9-2 Optical specifications
10G XFP
• 130-4904-900 XFP-OPT-SR transceiver specifications on page 9-34
• 130-4905-90x XFP-OPT-LR transceiver specifications on page 9-36
• 130-4906-90x XFP-EXT-ER transceiver specifications on page 9-39
• 130-4907-90x XFP-EXT-UR transceiver specifications on page 9-42
• 160-9002-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz
Tunable DWDM XFP specifications on page 9-45
• 160-9004-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz
Tunable Type 2 DWDM XFP specifications on page 9-49
• 134-5495-900 AM-XFP tunable transceiver specifications on page 9-53
40G XFP
• 160-9013-900 41.2G- 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP
• NTTA11AA 40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP
• NTTA11BAE6 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
• NTTA12BAE6 39.8G-44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
• NTTA13EEE6 39.8G-44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP
• Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface
circuit packs (40G line interface) on page 9-64
• NTTA03AA 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP
100G CFP
• NTTA03BJE6 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
• 160-9113-900 103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
• 160-9114-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
• 160-9115-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP
• NTTA03AA 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP

Optical specifications 9-3
• 160-9300-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km

CFP2 specifications on page 9-80
• 160-9301-900 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km
• 160-9310-900 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100 m, MPO
• 160-9320-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40 km
100G CFP2-ACO
• 180-1000-900 Wavelogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications on page
9-90
• 180-1010-900 Wavelogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications on page
9-91
• 180-1120-900 WaveLogic Enhanced-2.0, 1528-1567nm CFP2-ACO
100G QSFP28
• 160-9400-900: 100GBASE-SR4, 4x25G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO
QSFP28
• 160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km
QSFP28
• 160-9402-900: 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km
QSFP28
• 160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km
QSFP28
• 160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm, 40km QSFP28
• 160-9460-xxx: 103.1G-112.28G, 3m, QSFP28-QSFP28 AOC Datasheet
>100G
• xSLM-1-WL3 and OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e transceiver specifications on page
9-111
Supported wavelengths
• 40G DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) on page 9-114
• 5400 Switch 100G supported wavelengths and channels on page 9-115

B-700-1036-00x OPT-SR1/OPT-LX transceiver specifications

B-700-1036-00x OPT-SR1/OPT-LX transceiver specifications provides the
OPT-SR-1 Extended Temp OC3-OTU1 SR-1/I-1.1/ I-1.4/ I-1.16 (1310nm, 5 -
10 km) transceiver specifications.
ATTENTION
A pad may be required when interoperating with 3rd party equipment for
each OC3/12 rate.
Table 9-1
Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum
Part Number B-730-1036-001,

B-730-1036-002
CLEI WM3I702LAA,
IPUIBPLTAA
Optical Output Power (9/125m SMF) (dBm) -9.5 dBm, -3 dBm,

over 9/125 over 9/125
µm SMF µm SMF
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310
Optical Wavelength (nm) 1270 1360
Spectral Width (nm) 4
Optical Extinction Ratio (dB) 8.2
Receiver Sensitivity 2.7Gb/s -19.5

(BER=10-15)(dBm)
OC-48 (STM-16) -19.5
GbE -22
OC-12 (STM-4) -22
OC-3 (STM-1) -23
Receiver Optical Wavelength (nm) 1270 1600
Receiver Overload (dBm) -3
Receiver Damage Threshold (dBm) 4

Table 9-1
Transmission Range (9/125m OTU1 3

SMF) (km)
OC-48 (STM-16) 4
GbE 10
OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) 10
Temperature Range -5C to 85C

B-730-0001-00x OPT-IR1 transceiver specifications

B-730-0001-00x OPT-IR1 transceiver specifications provides the OPT-IR-1
Extended Temp OC3-OTU1 IR-1/S-1.1 / S-1.4 / S-1.16 (1310nm, 20-30km)
transceiver specifications.
Table 9-2
B-730-0001-00x OPT-IR1 transceiver specifications
Part Number B-730-0001-000,

B-730-0001-001
CLEI WMOTAFGGAA,
IPUIBPMTAA
Optical Output Power (9/125m SMF) (dBm) -4 -1
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) 2.7Gb/s -19.5
OC-48 (STM-16) -19.5
GbE -22
OC-3 (STM-1) -23
OC-12 (STM-4) -22
Receiver Overload (dBm) 0
Transmission Range (9/125m SMF) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) 30

(km)
OC-48 (STM-16() 20
OTU1
GbE 30
Temperature Range -5C 85C

160-9011-90x OPT-LR-1 transceiver specifications

160-9011-90x OPT-LR-1 transceiver specifications provides the SFP,OPT-
LR1 - Optical Plug-in - LR1 Multi-rate OC3/12/48/GBE/1G/2GFC/ OTU1 -
1310NM,APD - -5C TO 85C transceiver specifications.
Table 9-3
160-9011-90x OPT-LR-1 transceiver specifications
Part Number 160-9011-900

160-9011-901
CLEI WOTRAU3FAA
IPUIBPNTAA
Optical Output Power (9/125m SMF) (dBm) -1 2
Receiver Sensitivity (BER=10-15)(dBm) STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) -30
Input Optical Reflectance (dB) -12
Transmission Range (9/125m SMF) (km) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) 50
OC-48 (STM-16) 45
OTU1
GbE 50

160-9012-90x OPT-LR-2 Multi-rate transceiver specifications

160-9012-90x OPT-LR-2 Multi-rate transceiver specifications provides the
OPOPT-LR-2 Extended Temp 155Mbps-2.67 Gbps LR-2/L-2.1 / L-2.4 / L-2.16
(1550 nm, 80km) transceiver specifications.
Table 9-4
160-9012-90x OPT-LR-2 Multi-rate transceiver specifications

160-9012-901
CLEI WOTRAU4FAA,
IPUIBPPTAA
Optical Output Power (9/125m SMF) (dBm) -2 3
Receiver Sensitivity (BER=10-15)(dBm) 2.7Gb/s -9 -29.5
OC-48 (STM-16) -9 -29.5
2X Fiber -9 -28
GbE -9 -30
OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) -9 -30
Input Optical Reflectance (dB) -12
Transmission Range (9/125m SMF) (km) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) 100
OC-48 (STM-16) 80
GbE 100

B-700-1016-001 GigE 1000Base-SX transceiver specifications

B-700-1016-001 GigE 1000Base-SX transceiver specifications provides the
GigE 1000Base-SX SFP (850nm multi-mode fiber up to 500m OM3 fiber type)
Table 9-5
Parameter Classification
GE/1000-BaseSX
Part Number B-700-1016-001, Note 1
Note 1: All parameter values in the table achieve an optical system BER better than 1x10-12.
CLEI WM2IR0WBAA
Pluggable equipment type PGE
Standards SFP MSA and IEEE 802.3, 2000
Application GE 1000-BaseSX
Transmitter
Nominal wavelength 850 nm
Transmit output power (max) -1.5 dBm, Note 2
Note 2: The maximum transmit power is the lesser of Class 1 safety limits (CDRH and EN 60825) or
the receiver overload.
Transmit output power (min) -9.5 dBm
Spectral width (max) 0.85 nm (RMS)
Minimum side mode suppression ratio -
Minimum extinction ratio 9 dB
TX power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB
Receiver
Wavelength range 770 nm to 860 nm
Receiver sensitivity -17 dBm
Receiver overload 0 dBm
Path penalty -
Maximum receive reflectance -12 dB
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB

Table 9-5
GE/1000-BaseSX
Optical Path
Attenuation range -
Nominal reach, Note 3 150 m to 550 m, Note 4
Maximum dispersion -
Dispersion limited distance Note 4
Attenuation limited distance Note 4
Note 3: Nominal reach figures are for classification purposes only as defined in appropriate standards.
Note 4: 150 m to 300 m over 62.5 µm core, 200 MHz-km MMF; 220 m over 62.5 µm core, 160 MHz-
km MMF; 300 m to 550 m over 50 µm core, 500 MHz-km MMF; 500 m over 50 µm core, 400 MHz-km
MMF.
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W), Note 5 1
Note 5: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of
25 (+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V). For practical purposes, the rounded typical power
consumption of an equipment can be used as the equipment heat dissipation when calculating facilities
thermal loads (an estimate of the long term heat release of the item in a system).
Power Budget (W), Note 6 1
Note 6: The power budget values are based on the maximum power consumption in a system operating
at an ambient temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 Vdc (+/-2.5 V). These rounded
power values must be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.

B-700-1016-002 GigE 1000Base-LX transceiver specifications

B-700-1016-002 GigE 1000Base-LX transceiver specifications provides the
GigE 1000Base-LX SFP with LC Connector 1310nm for single-mode fiber,
distances up to 10km transceiver specifications.
Table 9-6
GE 1000-BaseLX
Part Number B-700-1016-002, Note 1
CLEI WM2IS0XBAA
Standards SFP MSA, IEEE 802.3, 2000 Edition, ANSI X3.230

Revision 4.3 06/94, ANSI X3.297 Revision 7.4 09/
96, ANSI INCITS 352-2002
Application GE 1000-BaseLX
Transmitter
Transmit output power (max) -3 dBm
Transmit output power (min) -9.5 dBm
Spectral width (max) 4 nm (RMS)
Minimum side mode suppression ratio -
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB
Receiver
Receiver overload -3 dBm
Path penalty -

Table 9-6
GE 1000-BaseLX
Optical Path
Attenuation range -
Nominal reach, Note 2 550 m to 10 km, Note 3
Maximum dispersion -
Dispersion limited distance Note 3
Attenuation limited distance Note 3
Note 3: 2m to 10 km over 10 µm SMF; 2 m to 550 m over MMF, when used with appropriate offset-
launch mode-conditioning patch cord.
Power
Note 5: The power budget values are based on the maximum power consumption in a system
operating at an ambient temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 Vdc (+/-2.5 V). These
rounded power values must be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.

162-0093-900 GigE 1000Base-ZX transceiver specifications

162-0093-900 GigE 1000Base-ZX transceiver specifications provides the
GigE 1000Base-ZX SFP (1550nm up to 80km) transceiver specifications.
Table 9-7
GE 1000-BaseZX
Part Number 162-0093-900, Note 1
Note 1: All parameter values in table achieve an optical system BER better than 1x10-12.
CLEI IPUIAG0TAA
Application 1000 Base-ZX type Ethernet Applications
Standards SFP MSA
Transmitter
Transmit output power (max) 5 dBm
Transmit output power (min) 0 dBm
Spectral width (max) 1 nm (-20 dB)
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB
Receiver
Path penalty 2 dB
Optical path
Attenuation range 5 dB to 22 dB

Table 9-7
GE 1000-BaseZX
Nominal reach, Note 2 80 km
Note 2: Nominal reach figures are for classification purposes only as defined in the appropriate
standards.
Maximum dispersion 1280 ps/nm
Dispersion limited distance, Note 3 ~75, Note 4
Attenuation limited distance, Note 3 ~88 km, Note 4
Note 3: The dispersion and attenuation limited distances are for guidance only and must be verified
by a full link budget calculation. The actual limiting distance is the lower of the dispersion limited or
attenuation limited distances.
Note 4: When used over NDSF SMF (link engineering is required for links using the ZX SFP).
Power

B-730-0004-001 GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T

specifications
B-730-0004-001 GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T specifications
provides the GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T SFP (100m, RJ45)
Table 9-8
B-730-0004-001 GigE - ELT-BT, electrical 10/100/1000Base-T specifications
Parameter Value
Transmission mode 10/100/1000 BaseT
Connector type RJ-45
Required cable Shielded Cat5e
Transmission range < 100m
Two types of cables are used to connect the Ethernet devices together, straight-through and
crossed-over cables. Straight-through wiring occurs when the user has wired both ends
identically, so that the signal passes straight through. Crossover wiring has a reverse order of
wiring.
A 10/100Base-T Ethernet cable utilizes two pairs of signals whereas a 1000Base-T Ethernet
cable contains four pairs of signals. For Electrical 1000Base-T Ethernet (EE1) ports and
electrical 10/100 Base-T Ethernet (EEX) ports, the cable-type parameter may be provisioned
to straight, cross over, or auto-detect. The default value for the parameter is auto-detect,
which enables the automatic detection and correction of incorrect cabling with respect to
crossed-over or straight-through cables.
The cable-type parameter sets the 10/100/1000Base-T ports to swap the signal pairs to
accommodate the specified type of RJ-45 cable that is connected to the port.

B-700-1035-00x GE 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM SFP specifications

B-700-1035-00x GE 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM SFP specifications provides
th OPT-xx-U, CWDM Ultra Long Reach (up to 100-120km) (where
xx=47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61) transceiver specifications.
Table 9-9
GE/FC100 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM
Part Number, CLEI, and wavelength, Note 1 B-700-1035-001 WM2IY0KBAA 1471 nm
B-700-1035-002 WM2IY0NBAA 1491 nm
B-700-1035-003 WM2IY0PBAA 1511 nm
B-700-1035-004 WM2IY0RBAA 1531 nm
B-700-1035-005 WM2IY0SBAA 1551 nm
B-700-1035-006 WM2IY0SBAA 1571 nm
B-700-1035-007 WM2IY0UBAA 1591 nm
B-700-1035-008 WM2IY0VBAA 1611 nm
Pluggable equipment type PGEFC
Standards SFP MSA
Application GE 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM
Transmitter
Nominal wavelength 1471 nm to 1611 nm at 20 nm +/- 6.5 nm
Transmit output power (max) 5 dBm
Transmit output power (min) 0 dBm
Spectral width (max) 1 nm (-20 dB)
Receiver
Nominal wavelength 1260 nm to 1620 nm at 20 nm

Table 9-9
GE/FC100 1.25 Gbits/s, 24 dB CWDM
Path penalty 2 dB
Optical Path
Attenuation range, Note 2 8 dB to 22 dB
Note 2: Attenuation range includes the dispersion penalty.
Nominal reach, Note 3 Note 4
Dispersion limited distance Note 4 and Note 5
Attenuation limited distance Note 4 and Note 5
Note 4: CWDM reach is consistent with Appendix II of ITU-T G.695 (refer to G.695 Table II.2 for
parameter values and G.695 Table II.1 for attenuation values). Dispersion limits are based on 21.1 ps/
nm-km.
Power

B-730-0006-0xx Multi-rate 15xx.yy nm SFP specifications

B-730-0006-0xx Multi-rate 15xx.yy nm SFP specifications provides th OPT-xx-
U, DWDM Ultra Long Reach (where xx=15-60) transceiver specifications. For
each part number in the range B-730-0006-015 to B-730-0006-060, Table 7-
6 in the System Description document provides ITU Channel, Model,
Wavelength, CLEI, and ECI.
Table 9-10
OC-48/STM16, OTU1, GE
15xx.yy nm DWDM
Pluggable equipment type P2G5
Standards IEEE 802.3ae
Transmitter
Laser modulation Intensity-Modulated Direct-Detection (IMDD)

Non-Return-to Zero (NRZ)
Wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1563.86 nm
Central wavelength accuracy +/- 0.10 GHz
Transmit output power (max.) 4 dBm
Transmit output power (min.) 0 dBm
Spectral width (max) 1 nm
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB
Chirp polarity Non-chirp
Receiver
Receiver sensitivity at OSNR >= 27 dB, Note 1 -28 dBm, Note 2
Note 1: Quoted OSNRs are as measured using 0.1 nm resolution bandwidth.

Note 2: The sensitivity level is the minimum optical power for which the interface meets a BER of
10-12.
Path penalty, at the dispersion maximum 2 dB

Table 9-10
OC-48/STM16, OTU1, GE
15xx.yy nm DWDM
Optical Path
Attenuation range at OSNR >= 27 dB, Note 3 12 dB to 26 dB
Note 3: Quoted OSNRs are as measured using 0.1 nm resolution bandwidth.
Nominal reach, Note 4 120 km
Note 4: Nominal reach figures are for classification purposes only as defined in the appropriate
standards.
Dispersion limited distance, Note 5 120 km
Attenuation limited distance, Note 5 100 km
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 1W, Note 6
consumption of an equipment can be used as the equipment heat dissipation when calculating
facilities thermal loads (an estimate of the long term heat release of the item in a system).
Power Budget (W) 1W, Note 7

160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10Km SFP+

specifications
160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10km SFP+
specifications provides the SFP PLUS, Optical Plug-In, 10G SR-1, OC-192/
OTU2/10GbE, (multi-rate, 1310nm, 10km) transceiver specifications.
Table 9-11
160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10km SFP+ specifications
10GBASE-L OC-192 SR-1/

VSR2000-2R1
Note 1: The SFP+ has the same form-factor as a conventional SFP but supports higher data rates.
This is a MSA compliant SFP+ (with standard body length).
CLEI WOTRCNMFAA
Pluggable equipment type PSFP
Standards 10GBASE-L, IEEE 802.3 • OC-192 SR-1, Telcordia GR-

253
• VSR2000-2R1, ITU-T G.693
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Nominal wavelength 1290 nm to 1330 nm
Launch power minimum in OMA -6.2 dBm N/A

minus TDP
Transmitter dispersion penalty, 1 dB N/A

TDP (max)
Transmit average output power N/A Note 2 -6 dBm to -1 dBm
Note 2: For Ethernet applications, average power is informative and not the principal indicator of
signal strength.
Tx average power monitor +/- 2 dB

accuracy, Note 3
Note 3: Power monitor accuracy stated applies to nominal operating power range.
Receiver
Connector type LC
Receiver sensitivity in OMA -12.6 dBm, Note 4 Not applicable

(max)

Table 9-11
160-9103-900 Multi-rate 10GE/OTU2/OC192, 1310nm, 10km SFP+ specifications
10GBASE-L OC-192 SR-1/

VSR2000-2R1
Note 4: Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Stressed receiver sensitivity in -10.3 Not applicable

OMA (max), BER not worse than
1E-12
Receiver overload (min) -1 dBm -1 dBm
Receiver damage level 3 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy, +/- 2 dB

Note 5
Optical path
Minimum channel insertion loss 0 dB
Nominal reach per standard 10 km 2 km
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 1, Note 6
Power Budget (W) 1, Note 7
operating at an ambient temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 Vdc (+/-2.5 V) or in the
full operational voltage range in the case of AC-powered equipment. These rounded power values
must be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.

160-9104-900 10GBASE-ER/FC1200, 1550nm, 40km, SFP+ specifications

provides the SFP+, Transceiver, 10GBase-ER, 40km, 1550nm, -10/85C
specifications.
Table 9-12
10GBASE
PEC 160-9104-900
CLEI WOTRDDBFAA
Application Ethernet and Fibre Channel
Standards 10GBASE-ER found in IEEE 802.3 clause 52
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Transmit average output power, Note 1 -4.7 dBm to 4 dBm
Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, Note 2
Transmitter dispersion penalty, (TDP) (max) 3.0 dB
Launch power minimum in optical modulation -2.1 dBm

amplitude (OMA) minus TDP
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average RX power range, Note 3 and Note 4 -1.0 dBm to 15.9 dBm @ ER of 3 dB
Note 4: Received power below the minimum average Rx power cannot be compliant; however, a
received power above the value listed does not ensure compliance.
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), Note 5 -14.1 dBm
Note 5: Receiver sensitivity is informative.

Table 9-12
10GBASE
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), -11.3 dBm

BER not worse than 1E-12
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, Note 6
Optical path
Nominal reach per standard 40 km
Power

160-9105-900 10GBASE-ZR, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ specifications

160-9105-900 10GBASE-ZR, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ specifications provides
the SFP+, Transceiver, 10GBase-ER, 40km, 1550nm, -10/85C specifications.
ATTENTION
Not supported on OSLM-50-10G with Gen1 PDUs.
Table 9-13
10GBASE-ZR
PEC 160-9105-900
CLEI WOTRDDCFAA
Application Ethernet
Standards N/A
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Transmit average output power 0 dBm to 4 dBm
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average RX power range -21 to -7 dBm @ up to 1600 ps/nm
Optical path

Table 9-13
10GBASE-ZR
Nominal reach per standard 80 km
Power
full operational voltage range in the case of AC-powered equipment. These rounded power values must
be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.


DWDM SFP+ specifications
DWDM SFP+ specifications provides the Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1565.50
nm Tunable, 50GHz, Type 1 DWDM SFP+ specifications.
ATTENTION
Not supported on OSLM-50-10G with Gen1 PDUs.
Table 9-14
160-9201-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1565.50 nm Tunable, 50GHz, Type 1 DWDM SFP+
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
PEC 160-9201-900
CLEI WOTRDNAFAA
Fiber single-mode fiber (SMF)
Application OTN, Ethernet, SONET/SDH
Standards N/A
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation Non-return-to-zero (NRZ) Multi-rate, with or

without Forward Error Correction (FEC)
Wavelength tuning range 1528.38 nm to 1565.50 nm, in 50 GHz

increments, Note 1
Note 1: The tuning range encompasses wavelengths on the 50 GHz ITU-T grid that are outside the C-
Band range used for 6500 Photonic and Common Photonic Layer Channel Mux/Demux 44 (CMD44)
50 GHz or Enhanced CMD44 50 GHz Channel Mux/Demux Hardware (above 1565.09 nm).
Central Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Line rate 9.95 Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.709 Gbit/s

FEC on/off, or 11.096 Gbit/s FEC on.
Transmit average output power, Note 2 -1 to +3 dBm
Note 2: For Ethernet application, average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength.

Table 9-14
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
Receiver
Connector type LC
Wavelength range 1528 nm to 1570 nm, Note 4
Note 4: The optical performance is only guaranteed over the transmitter nominal wavelength range.
Receiver damage level + 3 dBm
Receiver overload for BER <=1.0x10-12 - 7 dBm
Minimum sensitivity (without FEC @ 0 ps/nm) -22.0 dBm, Note 6
Minimum sensitivity (without FEC @ 1450 ps/nm) -19.0 dBm, Note 6
Minimum sensitivity (with FEC @ 0 ps/nm) -28.0 dBm, Note 6
Minimum sensitivity (with FEC @ 1450 ps/nm) -25.0 dBm, Note 6
Note 6: For OSNR of 35 dB or greater.
Rx OSNR 0 ps/nm to 1450 ps/nm dispersion bit rate in 21.0 dB, Note 7
the range of 9.95 to 11.09 Gb/s with FEC
Rx OSNR 0 ps/nm to 1450 ps/nm dispersion bit rate in 26.5 dB, Note 7
the range of 9.95 to 10.7 Gb/s without FEC, Note 8
Note 7: Supported Rx power range -19 dBm to -7 dBm.

Note 8: The 11.09 Gb/s rate is only supported with FEC enabled.
Chromatic dispersion tolerance 0 ps/nm to 1450 ps/nm
Optical path
Reach Application specific, Note 9
Note 9: Maximum allowed reach is subject to appropriate link engineering analysis. You must follow
the normal link engineering rules.

Table 9-14
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
Power
Typical XFP Power Consumption (W), Note 10 1

160-9204-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 40 km SFP+

specifications
The 160-9204-900 is supported in the typical CO environment and is also
supported in the extended temperature environment solution. 160-9204-900
9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 40 km SFP+ specifications provides
the 160-9204-900 specifications.
Table 9-15
160-9204-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 40 km SFP+ specifications
IR-2/S-64.2 10GBase-EW, ER P1S1-2D2 and

1S1-2d2bF
PEC 160-9204-900
CLEI WOTRDPNFAA
Pluggable equipment type P10GSOEL P10GSOEL P10GSOEL
Application SONET/SDH 10G Ethernet OTU2 applications

applications applications. The 160-
9204-900 also meets the
specifications mentioned
in this column at 11.09
and 11.05 Gbit/s.
Standards Telcordia GR-253 and IEEE 802.3 Clause 52 ITU-T G.959.1

ITU-T G.691 standards standards for
for applicable applicable
classification. classification.
Transmitter
Connector type LC LC LC
Nominal wavelength 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to 1565

nm
Transmit average output -1 dBm to 2 dBm -4.7 dBm to 4.0 dBm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm
power Note 1
Note 1: Average power for 10GBase-EW, ER is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength.
Transmit average power +/- 2 dB +/- 2 dB +/- 2 dB

monitor accuracy, Note 2
Note 2: Power monitor accuracy is +/- 2 dB within nominal operating ranges.
Launch power min. in OMA - -2.1 dBm -

minus TDP

Table 9-15

1S1-2d2bF
Transmitter dispersion - 3 dB -
penalty, TDP (max)
Receiver
Wavelength range 1260 nm to 1580 nm 1260 nm to 1580 nm 1260 nm to 1580

nm
Receiver power range, BER -1 dBm to -16 dBm - -1 dBm to -16 dBm
not worse than 1E-12
Average Rx power range, - -1 dBm to -15.8 dBm -
Receiver sensitivity in OMA -16 dBm -14.1 dBm -15 dBm

(max)
Stressed receiver sensitivity - -11.3 dBm -

in OMA (max), BER not
worse than 1E-12
Receiver damage level 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm
Receiver average power +/- 2 dB +/- 2 dB +/- 2 dB

Optical path
Minimum channel insertion 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB

loss
Attenuation range 3 dB to 11 dB 3 dB (minimum) 3 dB to 11 dB
Nominal reach per standard 40 km 30 km (40 km links can be 40 km

engineered links)
Power
Typical Power 1W, Note 4 1W, Note 4 1W, Note 4

Consumption (W)

Table 9-15

1S1-2d2bF
25 (+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V) or in the full operational voltage range in the case of AC-
powered equipment. For practical purposes, the rounded typical power consumption of an equipment
can be used as the equipment heat dissipation when calculating facilities thermal loads (an estimate
of the long term heat release of the item in a system).
Power Budget (W) 2W, Note 5 2W, Note 5 2W, Note 5
Multi-rate SFP+ 80km

160-9205-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 80km SFP+
specifications provides the 9.95-11.09 Multi-rate, 1550 nm,SMF, 80km, SFP+
Table 9-16
160-9205-900 9.95G-11.09G Multi-rate, 1550 nm, SMF, 80km SFP+ specifications
LR-2/L-64.2a 10GBase-ZR/FC1200 P1L1-2D2 and

1L1-2D2F
PEC 160-9205-900
CLEI WOTRDX7FAA
Pluggable equipment type PSFP PSFP PSFP
Application SONET/SDH Ethernet and Fibre OTN applications

applications Channel applications
Standards • ATIS-0900105.06 N/A ITU-T G.959.1

LR-2a/c P1L1-2D2, 1L1-
• ITU-T G.691 2D2F
L-64.2a/c
Transmitter

nm

Table 9-16

1L1-2D2F
Transmit average output 0 dBm to 4 dBm 0 dBm to 4 dBm 0 dBm to 4 dBm

power

Receiver

nm
Average Rx power range -24 dBm to -7 dBm -24 dBm to -7 dBm • -24 dBm to -7
dBm for P1L1-
2D2
• -25 dBm to -7
dBm for 1L1-
2D2F

Optical path
Attenuation range 11 dB to 22 dB 11 dB to 22 dB 11 dB to 22 dB
Nominal reach per standard 80 km 80 km 80 km
Power

Consumption (W)

Table 9-16

1L1-2D2F

130-4904-900 XFP-OPT-SR transceiver specifications

130-4904-900 XFP-OPT-SR transceiver specifications provides the XFP-
OPT-SR (Extended Temp) 850nm OM3 fiber type, 300m) transceiver
specifications.
Table 9-17
10GBASE-SW,SR
CLEI WMOTCTCFAA
Fiber Multi-mode fiber (MMF)
Pluggable equipment type P10GSOEL
Application 10G Ethernet applications
Standards Compliant with the current XFP Multi-Source

Agreement. Compliant with 10G Ethernet
10GBASE-SR/SW per IEEE 802.3ae.
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Launch power min. in optical modulation Compliant to the triple-trade off per IEEE 802.3
amplitude (OMA) minus transmitter dispersion
penalty (TDP)
Transmitter dispersion penalty (max) 3.9 dB
Transmitter waveform distortion penalty (TWDP), N/A

(max)
Transmit average output power -1.0 dBm to -7.3 dBm, Note 1 and Note 2
Note 1: The Tx Min/Max and Rx Min/Max values for the XFP are stored on the device and can be
retrieved via TL1 and Node Manager.
Transmit average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, Note 3
Receiver
Connector type LC

Table 9-17
10GBASE-SW,SR
Average Rx power range -1.0 dBm to -9.9 dBm, Note 4 and Note 5
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), -11.1 dBm, Note 5

Note 6 and Note 7
Note 6: Received power below this value cannot be compliant; however, a value above the value listed
in the table does not ensure compliance.
Note 7: The performance monitoring parameters OPRN and OPTN are based on the values stored
on the device and not the values indicated in the tables.
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), Bit -7.5 dBm

Error Rate (BER) not worse than 1E-12
Receiver power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, Note 8
Optical path
Nominal reach per standard Varies, Note 9
Note 9: Only Multi-mode fibers (MMF) are used with this XFP. The nominal reach is varied: 2 m to
26 m over 62.5 µm core, 160 MHz-km MMF; 2 m to 33 m over 62.5 µm core, 200 MHz-km MMF, 2 m to
66 m over 50 µm core, 400 MHz-km MMF, 2 m to 82 m over 50 µm core, 500 MHz-km MMF, 2 m to 300
m over 50 µm core, 2000 MHz-km MMF.
Power

130-4905-90x XFP-OPT-LR transceiver specifications

130-4905-90x XFP-OPT-LR transceiver specifications provides the XFP-OPT-
LR 10G SR-1/I-64.1 1310nm, multi-rate for single-mode fiber, distances up to
2km for OC-192/STM-64/OTU2/OTU2e; 10km for 10Gbe transceiver
specifications.
Table 9-18
SR-1/ I-64.1 10GBase-LR, LW VSR-2000-2R1
Part Number 130-4905-900, 130-4905-901
CLEI WMOTCTDFAA, IPUIBPHTAA

applications applications. XFP also
meets specifications listed
in this column at 11.09 &
11.05 Gbit/s.
Standards XFP device meets XFP device meets IEEE XFP device meets
Telcordia GR-253 and 802.3ae-2002 device ITU-T G.693
ITU-T G.691 specifications. standards.
standards.
Transmitter

nm
Transmit average output -1 dBm to -6 dBm, -1 dBm to -6 dBm, Note 1 -1 dBm to -6 dBm,
power Note 1 and Note 2 and Note 2 Note 1 and Note 2
Transmit average power +/- 2 dB, Note 3 +/- 2 dB, Note 3 +/- 2 dB, Note 3
monitor accuracy
Note 2: For Ethernet applications, average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength.
Launch power min. in OMA -- -6.2 dBm --

minus TDP

Table 9-18
Transmitter dispersion -- 3.2 dB --

penalty,
TDP (max)
Receiver

nm
Receiver power range, BER -1 dBm to -11 dBm, -- -1 dBm to -11 dBm,
not worse than 1E-12 Note 4 Note 4
Average Rx power range, -- 0.5 dBm to -14.4 --

Note 5 dBm, Note 6
Receiver sensitivity in OMA -- -12.6 dBm, Note 6 --

(max), Note 7
strength.
Note 6: The performance monitoring parameters OPRN and OPTN are based on the values stored on
the device and not the values indicated in the tables.
Note 7: Received power below this value cannot be compliant, however a value above the value listed
in the table does not ensure compliance.
Stressed receiver sensitivity -- -10.3 dBm --

worse than 1E-12
Receiver power monitor +/- 2 dB, Note 8 +/- 2 dB, Note 8 +/- 2 dB, Note 8
accuracy
Optical path
Minimum channel insertion -- 0 dB --

loss
Attenuation range 0 dB to 4 dB -- 0 dB to 4 dB

Table 9-18
Nominal reach per standard 2 km 10 km 2 km
Power
Typical XFP Power 2W, Note 9 2W, Note 9 2W, Note 9

Consumption (W)

130-4906-90x XFP-EXT-ER transceiver specifications

130-4906-90x XFP-EXT-ER transceiver specifications provides the XFP-Ext
Temp (-5 TO 85C) XFP-EXT-ER, Transceiver, OPT, 1550NM XFP/ OC192 IR-
2/ 10GBASE/OTN-ER transceiver specifications.
Table 9-19
IR-2/S-64.2 10GBase-EW, ER P1S1-2D2b and

1S1-2d2bF
Part Number 130-4906-900, 130-4906-901
CLEI WMOTCTEFAA, IPUIBPJTAA

applications applications, also meets
the specifications
mentioned in this column
at 11.09 and 11.05 Gbit/s.
Standards XFP device meets XFP device meets IEEE XFP device meets
Telcordia GR-253 and 802.3ae-2002 device ITU-T G.693
ITU-T G.691 standards specifications. standards for
for applicable applicable
classification. classification.
Transmitter

nm
Transmit average output 2 dBm to -1 dBm 2 dBm to -1 dBm 2 dBm to -1 dBm

power, Note 1, Note 2 and
Note 3
strength.


Table 9-19

1S1-2d2bF
Launch power min. in OMA - -2.1 dBm -

minus TDP
Transmitter dispersion - 3 dB -
penalty, TDP (max)
Receiver

nm
Receiver power range, BER -1 dBm to -16 dBm, -- -1 dBm to -16 dBm,
not worse than 1E-12 Note 5 and Note 6 Note 5 and Note 6
Average Rx power range, - -1 dBm to -15.8 dBm, -

Note 5, Note 6, and Note 7
strength.
Receiver sensitivity in OMA - -14.1 dBm -

(max)
Stressed receiver sensitivity - -11.3 dBm -

worse than 1E-12

Optical path
Minimum channel insertion - 3 dB -

loss
Attenuation range 3 dB to 11 dB - 3 dB to 11 dB

Table 9-19

1S1-2d2bF
Nominal reach per standard 40 km 30 km (40 km links can be 40 km

engineered links)
Power

Consumption (W)

130-4907-90x XFP-EXT-UR transceiver specifications

130-4907-90x XFP-EXT-UR transceiver specifications provides the XFP-OPT-
UR (LR-2 Extended Temp) 10G LR-2c/L-64.2c (multi-rate, 1550nm, 80km)
Table 9-20
LR-2/L-64.2 10GBase-ZR, ZW P1L1-2D2 and 1L1-

2D2F
Part Number 130-4907-900, 130-4907-901
CLEI WMOTCTFFAA, IPUIBPKTAA
Application SONET/SDH applications 10G Ethernet OTU2 applications

applications. Also meets
the specifications
mentioned in this
column at 11.09 and
11.05 Gbit/s.
Standards XFP device meets ITU-T XFP device meets IEEE XFP device meets
G.959.1 standards for 802.3ae-2002 device ITU-T G.693
applicable classification. specifications. standards for
applicable
classification.
Transmitter
Nominal wavelength 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to 1565 nm
Transmit average output 4 dBm to 0 dBm 4 dBm to 0 dBm 4 dBm to 0 dBm

power, Note 1, Note 2,
and Note 3
strength.


Table 9-20

2D2F
Receiver
Wavelength range 1525 nm to 1580 nm 1525 nm to 1580 nm 1525 nm to 1580 nm
Receiver power range, -7 dBm to -24 dBm, - -7 dBm to -26 dBm,

BER not worse than 1E- Note 5 and Note 6 Note 5 and Note 6
12
Average Rx power range, - -7 dBm to -24 dBm, -

Note 5, Note 6, and
Note 7
strength.

Optical path
Attenuation range 11 dB to 22 dB - 11 dB to 24 dB
Nominal reach per 80 km 80 km 80 km

standard
Power

Consumption (W)

Table 9-20

2D2F

160-9002-900 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50 GHz Tunable DWDM XFP

specifications
160-9002-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable
DWDM XFP specifications provides the C-Band Tunable transceiver
specifications.
ATTENTION
160-9002-900 only interworks with itself (bookended) and 160-9004-900
only interworks with itself (bookended) with the following exceptions
160-9002-900 and 160-9004-900 can interwork with each other using the
160-9002-900 link budgets.
Table 9-21
160-9002-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable DWDM XFP
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
CLEI COUIA1NPAA
Pluggable equipment type PXFP
Application SONET/SDH, 10G Ethernet
Standards XFP device meets Telcordia GR-253, ITUT-

G.691, IEEE 802.3ae-2002, 10 GFC 1200-
SM-LL-L
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation With or without FEC

increments, Note 1
Line rate 9.95 Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.709 Gbit/s

FEC on/off, 11.05 Gbit/s FEC on/off, or
11.096 Gbit/s FEC on/off.

Table 9-21
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
Transmit output power -1 to +3 dBm, Note 2 and Note 3
strength.
Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, see Note 4
Receiver
Connector type LC
Sensitivity -22.5 dBm. OSNR measured in a 0.1 nm

(maximum for BER <=1.0 x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, resolution bandwidth.
OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 9.95 to 10.709 Gb/
s)

(maximum for BER <=1.0 x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, resolution bandwidth.
OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate 11.09 Gb/s)

(maximum for BER <=1.0 x10-12, -300 to 1500 ps/nm resolution bandwidth.
dispersion, OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 9.95
to 10.709 Gb/s)

Table 9-21
specifications
Full C-band Tunable

dispersion, OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate 11.09 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 25.5 dB
(for pre-FEC BER <=1.0 x10-12, -300 to 1500 ps/nm
dispersion, RX input power in the range of -20 to -7 dBm,
bit rate in the range of 9.95 to 10.709 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 27.5 dB
Rx OSNR 17.2 dB
bit rate 10.709 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 18.2 dB
Rx OSNR 15.8 dB
(for Strong FEC with a post-FEC BER <=1.0 x10-12, -300
to 1600 ps/nm dispersion, RX input power in the range of
-22 to -7 dBm, bit rate 10.709 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 16.7 dB
(for Strong FEC with a post-FEC BER <=1.0 x10-12, -300
to 1600 ps/nm dispersion, RX input power in the range of
-22 to -7 dBm, bit rate in the range of 11.05 to 11.09 Gb/
s)
Sensitivity -29 dBm. OSNR measured in a 0.1 nm

(maximum for Strong FEC with a post-FEC BER <=1.0 resolution bandwidth.
x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the
range of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s)

(maximum for BER <=1.8 x10-4, 0 ps/nm dispersion, resolution bandwidth. A pre-FEC BER of
OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 10.709 to 11.09 <= 1.8x10-4 corresponds to a post-FEC BER
Gb/s) of <=10-12 for RS8 FEC.

Table 9-21
specifications
Full C-band Tunable

x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in the

x10-12, 1600 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in
the range of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s)

OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in the range of 10.709 to 11.09 <= 1.8x10-4 corresponds to a post-FEC BER
Gb/s) of <=10-12 for RS8 FEC.
Optical path
Nominal reach Up to 80 km, Note 7
Note 7: The dispersion and attenuation limited distances are for guidance only and must be verified by
a full link budget calculation. The actual limiting distance is the lower of the dispersion limited or
Power


Type 2 DWDM XFP specifications
Type 2 DWDM XFP specifications provides the enhanced OSNR C-band
tunable transceiver specifications.
ATTENTION
160-9002-900 only interworks with itself (bookended) and 160-9004-900
only interworks with itself (bookended) with the following exceptions
160-9002-900 and 160-9004-900 can interwork with each other using the
160-9002-900 link budgets.
The 160-9004-900 XFP is a C-band pluggable module similar to the 160-

9002-900 XFP, but is optimized for long haul applications and has improved
OSNR specifications. The actual reach improvements are determined by
OnePlanner.
Table 9-22
160-9004-900 Multi-rate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable Type 2 DWDM XFP
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
PEC 160-9004-900
CLEI IPUIBSPTAA
Pluggable equipment type PXFP
Application SONET/SDH, 10G Ethernet
Standards XFP device meets Telcordia GR-253,

ITUT-G.691, IEEE 802.3ae-2002,
10 GFC 1200-SM-LL-L
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation With or without FEC

increments, Note 1

Table 9-22
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
Line rate 9.95 Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.709 Gbit/

s FEC on/off, 11.05 Gbit/s FEC on/off, or
11.096 Gbit/s FEC on/off.
Transmit output power -1 to +3 dBm, Note 2 and Note 3
strength.
Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, see Note 4
Receiver
Connector type LC

(maximum for BER <=1.0 x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR resolution bandwidth.
> 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 9.95 to 10.709 Gb/s)

(maximum for BER <=1.0 x10-12, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR resolution bandwidth.
> 35 dB, bit rate 11.09 Gb/s)

dispersion, OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 9.95
to10.709 Gb/s)

Table 9-22
specifications
Full C-band Tunable
Rx OSNR 25.5 dB
dispersion, RX input power in the range of -20 to -7 dBm, bit
rate in the range of 9.95 to 10.709 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 27.5 dB
dispersion, RX input power in the range of -20 to -7 dBm, bit
rate in the range of 11.05 to 11.09 Gb/s)
Rx OSNR 15.7 dB
(for pre-FEC BER <=1.8 x10-4, -300 dispersion, RX input
power in the range of -20 to -10 dBm)
Rx OSNR 14.2 dB
(for pre-FEC BER <=1.8 x10-4, 800 ps/nm dispersion, RX
input power in the range of -20 to -10 dBm)
Rx OSNR 17.7 dB
Rx OSNR 13.7 dB
(for pre-FEC BER <=1.98 x10-3, -300 ps/nm dispersion, RX
Rx OSNR 12.3 dB
Rx OSNR 15.2 dB
Sensitivity -29 dBm. OSNR measured in a 0.1 nm

(maximum for Strong FEC with a post-FEC BER <=1.0 x10- resolution bandwidth.
12
, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 35 dB, bit rate in the range
of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s)

(maximum for BER <=1.8 x10-4, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR resolution bandwidth. A pre-FEC BER of
> 35 dB, bit rate in the range of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s) <= 1.8x10-4 corresponds to a post-FEC
BER of <=10-12 for RS8 FEC.

Table 9-22
specifications
Full C-band Tunable

12
, 0 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in the range
of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s)

12
, 1600 ps/nm dispersion, OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in the

OSNR > 25 dB, bit rate in the range of 10.709 to 11.09 Gb/s) <= 1.8x10-4 corresponds to a post-FEC
BER of <=10-12 for RS8 FEC.
Optical path
Nominal reach Up to 80 km, Note 7
Power

134-5495-900 AM-XFP tunable transceiver specifications

134-5495-900 AM-XFP tunable transceiver specifications provides the AM-
XFP tunable transceiver specifications.
Table 9-23
134-5495-900 AM-XFP tunable transceiver specifications
Transmitter Optical Interface
Output Power (dBm) -10 1.5
Wavelength (nm) 5400 Switch 100G DWDM 1528.77 1560.61

wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) on page 9-115
Tunable Wavelength Spacing (GHz) 50
Laser Spectral Width (MHz) 20
Central Wavelength Accuracy (nm) 0.02
Receiver Optical Interface
Receiver Wavelength (nm) Wide Band (C Band)
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) (BER=10-12) -31
Receiver Overload (dBm) 7
Temperature Range -5 to 75C

specifications
specifications provides the 160-9013-900 specifications.
Table 9-24
160-9013-900 41.2G- 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP specifications
41.2G-44.6G Multi-rate
PEC 160-9013-900, Note 1
Note 1: All parameters are calculated for each individual optical lane (and not for the total of all optical
lanes supported by the CFP).
CLEI IPU3A0BLAA
Fiber Single-mode fiber (SMF)
Pluggable equipment type PCFP
Application 41.2G-44.6G Multi-rate application
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3ba

40GBASE-ER4
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Nominal wavelength 1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, and 1331 nm
Transmit average output power (each lane), Note 2 -1.1 dBm to 3.8 dBm
Note 2: For Ethernet application, power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each 0 dBm

lane)
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) each lane, 2.6 db

(max)
Tx average power monitor accuracy, Note 3 +/- 2 dB
Receiver
Connector type LC

Table 9-24
160-9013-900 41.2G- 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP specifications
Average Rx power range (each lane), Note 4 and -19 dBm to -1.3 dBm
Note 5
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max) -18 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), BER not -15.8 dBm

worse than 1E-12 (each lane)
Receiver overload -1.3 dBm
Receiver damage level 3.8 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy, Note 6 +/- 2 dB
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 18 dB
Power


specifications
specifications provides the NTTA11AA transceiver specifications. provides
circuit pack support information.
Table 9-25
NTTA11AA 40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP specifications
40GBASE-SR4
PEC NTTA11AA, Note 1
CLEI WOTRCR3FAA
Application Ethernet applications
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012

40GBASE-SR4
Transmitter
Connector type MPO12, Note 2
Note 2: A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this CFP.
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each -6.5 dBm

lane)
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) each lane, (max) 3.5 dB
Receiver

Table 9-25
NTTA11AA 40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP specifications
40GBASE-SR4
Average Rx power range (each lane), -9.5 dBm (OM3) or -9.1 dBm (OM4) to 2.4 dBm
Note 6 and Note 7
Note 8: For SR4 modules (NTTA11AA CFP), the OMA sensitivity is not explicitly specified due to the
additional penalty sources beyond Transmitter Dispersion Penalty.

Receiver overload 2.4 dBm
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 1.9 dB, OM3 fiber

1.5 dB, OM4 fiber
Power


specifications
specifications provides the NTTA11BAE6 specifications.
Table 9-26
NTTA11BAE6 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
40GBASE-LR4
PEC NTTA11BAE6, Note 1
CLEI IPU3AWZLAA
Application 40 Gigabit Ethernet application
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3 Clause 87

40GBASE-LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each lane) -4.8 dBm
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average Rx power range (each lane), Note 4 and Note 5 -13.7 dBm to 2.3 dBm

Table 9-26
NTTA11BAE6 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
40GBASE-LR4
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max) -11.5 dBm

Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 6.7 dB
Power


specifications
specifications provides the NTTA12BAE6 specifications.
Table 9-27
NTTA12BAE6 39.8G-44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
PEC NTTA12BAE6, Note 1
CLEI IPU3AWYLAA
Application 39.8G-44.6G Multi-rate application

40GBASE-LR4, OTL3.4, and STL256.4
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average Rx power range (each lane), Note 4 -13.7 dBm to 2.3 dBm

Table 9-27
NTTA12BAE6 39.8G-44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
Optical path
Power


specifications
specifications provides the 40G CFP serial transceiver specifications.
Table 9-28
NTTA13EEE6 39.8G-44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP specifications
VSR2000-3R2 VSR2000-3L2F 40GBASE-FR

(SONET) (OTN) (Ethernet)
PEC NTTA13EEE6, Note 1
CLEI IPU3AWXLAA
Application SONET OTN Ethernet
Standards MSA-Compliant 40 Gbsp Pluggables
Transmitter
Nominal wavelength 1530nm to 1565nm 1530nm to 1565nm 1530nm to 1565nm
Transmit average output power 0 dBm to 3 dBm 0 dBm to 3 dBm 0 dBm to 3 dBm
(each lane), Note 2
Transmitter dispersion penalty 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB

(TDP) each lane, (max)
Tx average power monitor +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB

accuracy, Note 3
Note 3: Power monitor accuracy is +/- 1.5 dB within nominal operating ranges.
Receiver
Wavelength range 1530 nm to 1530 nm to 1530 nm to

1565 nm 1565 nm 1565 nm

Table 9-28
NTTA13EEE6 39.8G-44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP specifications
VSR2000-3R2 VSR2000-3L2F 40GBASE-FR

(SONET) (OTN) (Ethernet)
Average Rx power range (each -6 dBm to 3 dBm -8 dBm to 3 dBm -6 dBm to 3 dBm
lane), Note 4 and Note 5
Receiver overload 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy, +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB

Note 6
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion 4 dB 6 dB 4 dB

loss
Power
Typical Power Consumption 9, Note 7 9, Note 7 9, Note 7

(W)
Power Budget (W) 12, Note 8 12, Note 8 12, Note 8

Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface

circuit packs (40G line interface)
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit
packs (40G line interface) provides the TSLM-2-D and MSLM-40G-ULH
Table 9-29
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line
interface)
Parameter 134-5465-900, 134-5455-901, 134- 134-5456-900, 134-5456-901

5455-900 (Colored) (Colorless)
Transmitter
Connector type LC LC
Laser modulation eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz < 1 MHz
Line rate 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud
Dual-polarization QPSK) Dual-polarization QPSK)
Tunable wavelength 1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm for C- 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm for C-

range band circuit packs band circuit packs (see 40G DWDM
1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm for L- C-band wavelengths (50 GHz
band circuit pack spacing) for a list of supported
(see 40G DWDM C-band wavelengths)
wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) for a
list of supported wavelengths)
Tunable wavelength 50 GHz 50 GHz

spacing
Central Wavelength +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz

Accuracy
Transmit output power -11 to 0 dBm -11 to -3 dBm
Tx Power monitor +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB

accuracy
Receiver
Receiver type PIN Balanced PIN
Wavelength range C-Band (1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm) C-Band (1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm)
L-Band (1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm)

Table 9-29
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line
interface)
Parameter 134-5465-900, 134-5455-901, 134- 134-5456-900, 134-5456-901

5455-900 (Colored) (Colorless)
Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm for 134-5465-900, 134- -20 dBm (per channel) (see Note 1
(minimum EOL) 5455-901, 134-5455-900 and Note 2)
Receiver overload 7 dBm (see Note 3) 0 dBm (per channel) (see Note 2 and
Note 4)
7 dBm (total power) (see Note 2 and
Note 4)
Receiver damage level 17 dBm 17 dBm (total power) (see Note 2)
Rx Power monitor +/- 0.5 dB at power levels >= -10 +/- 2 dB (per channel) at power levels
accuracy dBm >= -10 dBm (see Note 2)
+/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power
levels >= -10 dBm (see Note 2)
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 9.2 dB (using Ciena proprietary FEC) 9.2 dB (using Ciena proprietary FEC)
Polarization Mode 8 ps [mean DGD] for 134-5455-900 30 ps [mean DGD] for 134-5456-901
Dispersion (PMD) 25 ps [mean DGD] for 134-5465-900, 10 ps [mean DGD] for 134-5456-900
134-5455-901
Chromatic dispersion +/- 50000 ps/nm

tolerance
Reach Up to 1800 km for 134-5465-900,

134-5455-901
Up to 600 km for 134-5455-900
Note 1: The minimum per channel received power level is -22.5 dBm which does not take into account
any Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 2: The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One
for total input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to the
CCMD12 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]). And one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). When the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
is used in colored Photonic systems, the two 40G OCLD Rx interface detectors see similar power levels.
In colored line systems, the total input power monitor is the preferred monitor for channel power since it
is more accurate.
Note 3: The maximum received power level is +7.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx
power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 4: The maximum per channel received power level is 0 dBm, which does not take into account
any Rx power monitor inaccuracy.


specifications
specifications provides the NTTA03AA specifications.
Table 9-30
NTTA03AA 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP specifications
OTU4 100GBASE-SR10
PEC NTTA03AA, Note 1
CLEI WOTRCWWFAA
Application OTU4 applications Ethernet applications

100GBASE-SR10
Transmitter
Connector type MPO24, Note 2 MPO24, Note 2
Nominal wavelength 840 nm to 860 nm 840 nm to 860 nm
Transmit average output power (each lane), Note 3 -7.6 dBm to 2.4 dBm -7.6 dBm to 2.4 dBm
strength.
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) each lane, (max) - 3.5 dB
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane - -5.6 dBm to 3 dBm
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each lane) - -6.5 dBm
Tx average power monitor accuracy N/A (this CFP has no Tx power monitors)
Receiver
Connector type MPO24, Note 4 MPO24, Note 4
Minimum input power, each lane -9.5 dBm -

Table 9-30
NTTA03AA 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP specifications
OTU4 100GBASE-SR10
Average Rx power range (each lane), Note 5 and Note 6 N/A -9.5 dBm to 2.4 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), BER not N/A -5.4 dBm
worse than 1E-12, each lane
Receiver overload 2.4 dBm 3.0 dBm in OMA
Receiver damage level 3.4 dBm 3.4 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy N/A (this CFP has no Rx power monitors)
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 1.9 dB, OM3 fiber 1.9 dB, OM3 fiber
1.5 dB, OM4 fiber 1.5 dB, OM4 fiber
Nominal reach each standard OM3 fiber: 100 m OM3 fiber: 100 m
OM4 fiber: 150 m OM4 fiber: 150 m
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 9, Note 7 9, Note 7
Power Budget (W) 12, Note 8 12, Note 8


specifications
specifications provides the NTTA03BJE6 specifications.
Table 9-31
NTTA03BJE6 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
100GBASE-LR4 OTU-4 4L1-9D1F
PEC NTTA03BJE6, Note 1
CLEI IPUIBM0TAA
Application Ethernet applications OTU4 applications
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012 100GBASE-LR4, and

OTU4 4I1-9D1F requirements specified in ITU-T
Recommendations G.959.1/G.709.
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Transmit average output power -4.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm -2.5 dBm to +4 dBm, Note 3
(each lane), Note 2
Note 3: The -2.5 dBm figure is derived from a minimum extinction ratio of 7 dB, using the approach
of ITU G.959.1.
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) 2.2 dB -

each lane, (max)
Optical Modulation Amplitude -1.3 to 4.5 -

(OMA), each lane
Launch power minimum in OMA -2.3 dBm -

minus TDP (each lane)
Maximum optical path penalty - 1.5 dB
Tx average power monitor accuracy, +/- 2 dB -

Note 4

Table 9-31
NTTA03BJE6 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP specifications
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average Rx power range (each -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm -8.8 dBm to 4 dBm
lane), Note 5
Receiver overload 4.5 dBm 4 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy, Note 6 +/- 2 dB +/- 2 dB
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), -8.6 dBm -

each lane
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 6.3 dB 6.3 dB
Nominal reach each standard 10 km 10 km
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 21, Note 7 21, Note 7
Power Budget (W) 24, Note 8 24, Note 8


specifications
Table 9-32
160-9113-900 103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP specifications
100GBASE-LR4
PEC 160-9113-900, Note 1
CLEI WOTRC0AFAA

100GBASE- LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane -1.3 to 4.5
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each lane) -2.3 dBm
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average Rx power range (each lane), Note 4 and Note 5 -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm

Table 9-32
160-9113-900 103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP specifications
100GBASE-LR4

Optical path
Nominal reach each standard 10 km
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 13W, Note 7
Power Budget (W) 16W, Note 8

Dual rate QSFP+ specifications

160-9502-900 dual rate 41.2G to 43.0G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km
QSFP+ specifications provides the dual rate 41.2G TO 43.0G, 4x10G CWDM,
SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP+ transceiver specifications.
Table 9-33
160-9502-900 dual rate 41.2G to 43.0G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km QSFP+ specifications
40GBASE-LR4 OTU3
PEC 160-9502-900
CLEI WOTRDC6FAA
Pluggable equipment type PQCFP
Application 4x100GE and 40GBASE-LR4 OTU3 applications

Ethernet applications
Standards MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3 Clause 87 40GBASE-LR4 and

G.695, C4S1-2D1
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Transmit average output power, For -7.0 dBm to 2.3 dBm -2.3 dBm to 2.3 dBm
Ethernet application, average power is
informative and not the principal
indicator of signal strength
strength
Launch power minimum in OMA minus -4.8 dBm N/A

TDP
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP), 2.6 dB N/A

(max)
Extinction ratio (min) 3.5 dB 1.5 dB
Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB

Power monitor accuracy stated applies
to nominal operating power range.

Table 9-33
40GBASE-LR4 OTU3
Receiver
Connector type LC

1284.5 nm to 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm to 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm to 1337.5 nm
Average Rx power range, Average -13.7 dBm to 2.3 dBm -9.0 dBm to 2.3 dBm
power is informative and not the
principal indicator of signal strength.
and For 40BASE-LR4 applications, a
received power below the minimum
average Rx power cannot be
compliant; however, a received power
above the value listed does not ensure
compliance..
Note 4: For 40BASE-LR4 applications, a received power below the minimum average Rx power
cannot be compliant; however, a received power above the value listed does not ensure compliance.
Receiver sensitivity (max) -11.5 dBm (measured in OMA), -10.8 dBm (measured in
Receiver sensitivity for Ethernet average power)
application is informative.
Note 5: Receiver sensitivity for Ethernet application is informative.
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA -9.6 dBm N/A

(max), BER not worse than 1E-12
Receiver overload 2.3 dBm 2.3 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy, Power +/- 2 dB

monitor accuracy stated applies to
nominal operating power range.

Table 9-33
40GBASE-LR4 OTU3
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss in 6.7 dB 6.7 dB

OMA
Power


specifications
Table 9-34
160-9114-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP specifications
100GBASE-LR4 OTU-4 4I1-9D1F
PEC 160-9114-900, Note 1
CLEI WOTRC0BFAA
Fiber Single-mode fiber (SMF) Single-mode fiber (SMF)
Pluggable equipment type PCFP PCFP
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012 100GBASE-LR4, and

Transmitter
Transmit average output power (each -4.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm -2.5 to 4.0 dBm, Note 3
lane), Note 2
Note 3: The -2.5 dBm figure is derived from a minimum extinction ratio of 7 dB, using the approach of
ITU G.959.1.

each lane, (max)
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), -1.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm -

each lane

Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB, Note 4 -

Table 9-34
Receiver
Average Rx power range (each lane), -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm -8.8 dBm to 4 dBm
Note 5 and Note 6

each lane
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 6.3 dB 6.3 dB
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 13W, Note 8 13W, Note 8
Power Budget (W) 16W, Note 9 16W, Note 9


specifications
Table 9-35
100GBASE-ER4 OTU-4 4L1-9C1F
Part Number 160-9115-900, Note 1
CLEI WOTRC40FAA
Fiber Single-mode fiber (SMF) Single-mode fiber (SMF)
Pluggable equipment type PCFP PCFP
Standards CFP MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.2012 100GBASE- ER4 and

OTU4 4I1-9C1F requirements specified in ITU-T
Transmitter
Transmit average output power (each -2.9 to 2.9 dBm -2.7 to 2.9 dBm
lane), Note 2
strength.

each lane, (max)
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), -0.1 to 4.5 dBm -

each lane
Tx average power monitor accuracy, +/- 2 dB -

Note 3
Receiver

Table 9-35
Average Rx power range (each lane), -20.9 to 4.5 dBm, Note 6 -20.7 dBm to 4.5 dBm
Note 4 and Note 5
strength.
Note 6: The average receive power, each lane (max) for 100GBASE-ER4 is larger than the
100GBASE-ER4 transmitter value to allow compatibility with 100GBASE-LR4 units at short distances.
Receiver overload 4.5 dBm 4.5 dBm
Minimum input power, each lane - -20.7 dBm

each lane
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA -17.9 dBm

(each lane)
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 15 dB, see next entry 18 dB
Nominal reach each standard 30 km, Note 8 40 km
Note 8: Links longer than 30 km are considered engineered links. Attenuation for such links needs to
be less than the worst case for single-mode cabled optical fiber as per IEEE 802.3 2012. The maximum
insertion loss for 40 km reach is 18 dB.
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 13W, Note 9 13W, Note 9

Table 9-35
Power Budget (W) 16W, Note 10 16W, Note 10


specifications
specifications provides the 160-9300-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM,
SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km CFP2 100GE and OTU-4 transceiver specifications.
Table 9-36
160-9300-900 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km CFP2 specifications
PEC 160-9300-900
All parameters are calculated for each individual optical lane (and not for the total of all optical lanes
supported by the CFP2).
CLEI WOTRDEAFAA
Standards CFP2 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012 100GBASE-LR4, and

Transmitter
Connector type LC
Nominal wavelength 1294.53 nm to 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Transmit average output power (each -4.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm -0.6 to 4.0 dBm
lane)
Average power for 100GBASE-LR4 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.

each lane, (max)

each lane


Table 9-36
Tx average power monitor accuracy, +/- 2 dB
Receiver
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Average Rx power range (each lane) -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm -10.3 dBm to 4 dBm
• Average power for 100GBASE-LR4 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
• Received power below the minimum average Rx power cannot be compliant; however, a received
power above the value listed does not ensure compliance.
• For OTU-4, specified at a BER of 10-6 (pre-FEC), per ITU-T G.sup39.

each lane
Receiver sensitivity (max), each lane - -8.8 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA -6.8 dBm -

(max), BER not worse than 1E-12,
each lane
Optical path
Power

Table 9-36
Power Budget (W) 9 (max), Note 2


specifications
specifications provides the 160-9301-900 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM,
SMF, 1310 nm, 10 km CFP2 transceiver specifications.
Table 9-37
specifications
100GBASE-LR4
PEC 160-9301-900
CLEI WOTRDRJFAA
Standards CFP2 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.32012

100GBASE-LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Transmit average output power (each lane) -4.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm
Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) each lane, 2.2 dB

(max)
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane -1.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each -2.3 dBm

lane)
Power monitor accuracy stated applies to nominal operating power range.

Table 9-37
specifications
100GBASE-LR4
Receiver
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Average Rx power range (each lane) -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm
• Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
• A received power below this value cannot be compliant; however, a received power above the value
listed does not ensure compliance.
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), each lane -8.6 dBm

Optical path
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 7
Power Budget (W) 9 (max)


specifications
specifications provides the 160-9310-900 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF,
850 nm, 100 m, MPO CFP2 100GE and OTU-4 transceiver specifications.
Table 9-38
160-9310-900 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100 m, MPO CFP2 specifications
100GBASE-SR10 OTU4
PEC 160-9310-900
CLEI WOTRDEBFAA
Standards CFP2 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012

100GBASE-SR10
No SR10 OTU4 standard, but rate is supported.
Transmitter
Connector type MPO24
A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this CFP2.
Transmit average output power (each lane) -7.6 dBm to 2.4 dBm
Average power for 100GBASE-SR10 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP) each lane, (max) 3.5 dB -
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane -5.6 dBm to 3 dBm -
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (each lane) -6.5 dBm -
Connector type MPO24
A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this CFP2.

Table 9-38
100GBASE-SR10 OTU4

Table 9-38
100GBASE-SR10 OTU4
Average Rx power range (each lane) -9.5 dBm to 2.4 dBm -
• Average power for 100GBASE-SR10 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), BER not -5.4 dBm -

Receiver overload 3.0 dBm in OMA 2.4 dBm
Optical path

1.5 dB, OM4 fiber
Nominal reach each standard OM3 fiber: 100 m

OM4 fiber: 150 m
Power


specifications
Table 9-39
PEC 160-9320-900
CLEI WOTRDMJFAA
Standards CFP2 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012 100GBASE- ER4

and OTU4 4I1-9C1F requirements specified in ITU-T
Transmitter
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Transmit average output power (each -2.9 to 2.9 dBm -2.7 to 2.9 dBm
lane)
For Ethernet application, power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.

each lane, (max)
Transmitter optical Modulation +0.1 to 4.5 dBm -

Amplitude (OMA), each lane
Tx average power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB

Table 9-39
Receiver
Connector type LC
Average Rx power range (each lane) -20.9 to 4.5 dBm -23.2 dBm to 4.5 dBm
• Average power for 100GBASE-ER4 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
• The average receive power, each lane (max) for 100GBASE-ER4 is larger than the 100GBASE-ER4
transmitter value to allow compatibility with 100GBASE-LR4 units at short distances.

each lane

(each lane)
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 15 dB, see next entry 18 dB
Links longer than 30 km are considered engineered links. Attenuation for such links needs to be less
than the worst case for single-mode cabled optical fiber as per IEEE 802.3-2012. The maximum
insertion loss for 40 km reach is 18 dB.
Power

Table 9-39
powered equipment.
WaveLogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO

180-1000-900 Wavelogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications provides the
WaveLogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO transceiver specifications.
Table 9-40
180-1000-900 Wavelogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications
For use with OSLM-5-WL3n module
PEC 180-1000-900
CLEI WOTREBDFAA
Fiber Single mode fiber (SMF)
Pluggable equipment type CFP2-ACO
Transmitter
Connector type Duplex LC/UPC Receptacle
Line rate 100G
Laser modulation Dual-polarization 4ASK
Provisionable wavelength range 1528.773 nm to 1566.723 nm
Frequency tuning Full C-band gridless/arbitrary frequency

tuning
Transmit output provisionable power range -9 dBm to -5 dBm
Output power accuracy For Tx output power in the range -20

dBm to -10 dBm, accuracy is +/- 2dB
For Tx output power in the range -10
dBm to +5 dBm, accuracy is +/- 1dB

Table 9-40
180-1000-900 Wavelogic Basic-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications
ACO reach 300 km (nominal)
Receiver
Receiver type Intradyne coherent receiver with

balanced photodiode and
transimpedence amplifier
Connector type 104-pin CFP2
Minimum operating input power -24dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy • +/-0.5dB for total power (signal +

noise)
• +/- 4dB for signal power
• Min Rx input power is determined by
link budget analysis
Receiver damage level +11dBm
Polarization dependent loss (PDL), RSS max 2dB
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) tolerance 50ps (mean DGD) +/-35,000ps/nm
Power
Typical Power Consumption (W) 12W
Power Budget (W) 14W
WaveLogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO

180-1010-900 Wavelogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications provides
the WaveLogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO transceiver specifications.
Table 9-41
180-1010-900 Wavelogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications
PEC 180-1010-900
CLEI WOTREBEFAA
Fiber Single mode fiber (SMF)
Pluggable equipment type CFP2-ACO

Table 9-41
180-1010-900 Wavelogic Standard-1.0 CFP2-ACO specifications
Transmitter
Connector type Duplex LC/UPC Receptacle
Line rate 100G
Laser modulation Dual-polarization 4ASK
Provisionable wavelength range 1528.773 nm to 1566.723 nm
Frequency tuning Full C-band gridless/arbitrary frequency

tuning
Transmit output provisionable power range -9 dBm to -5 dBm
Output power accuracy For Tx output power in the range -20

dBm to -10 dBm, accuracy is +/- 2.5 dB
For Tx output power in the range -10
dBm to +5 dBm, accuracy is +/- 1.5 dB
ACO reach 1000 km (nominal)
Receiver
Receiver type Intradyne coherent receiver with

balanced photodiode and
transimpedence amplifier
Connector type 104-pin CFP2
Minimum operating input power -24dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy • +/-0.5dB for total power (signal +

noise)
• +/- 4dB for signal power
• Min Rx input power is determined by
link budget analysis
Receiver damage level +11dBm
Polarization dependent loss (PDL), RSS max 2 dB
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) tolerance 50ps (mean DGD) +/-35,000ps/nm
Power
Power Consumption (W) 12W
Power Budget (W) 14W

180-1120-900 WaveLogic Enhanced-2.0 CFP2-ACO specifications

Table 9-42
180-1120-900 WaveLogic Enhanced-2.0, 1528-1567nm CFP2-ACO specifications
OTU-4 4L1-9C1F
PEC 180-1120-900
CLEI WOTRD5RFAA
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Line rate 137.85 Gb/s (34.4619 Gbaud)
Laser modulation Dual-polarization QPSK
Transmitter tunable wavelength range 1528.77 to 1566.72 nm

191.3500 THz to 196.1000 THz
Transmitter tunable wavelength spacing Tx channel spacing=50GHz: 50GHz

spacing
Fixed Grid Wavelength count 96

C-band at 50GHz spacing (fully tunable)
Transmit output power -9.0 to -5.0 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 1.5 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Balanced Pin Coherent
Connector type LC
Minimum operating input power, Note 1 -20 dBm
Note 1: The minimum receiver channel power, as measured with a power meter with a single channel
present, is the minimum input power that is needed to attempt re-acquisition after signal disruption.
Rx power monitor accuracy, Note 2 +/- 4 dB (per-channel)

+/- 3 dB (total power)

Table 9-42
180-1120-900 WaveLogic Enhanced-2.0, 1528-1567nm CFP2-ACO specifications
OTU-4 4L1-9C1F
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) 2 dB
ROADM support Up to 16 (estimate)
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) tolerance 150 ps [mean DGD]
Chromatic dispersion tolerance, Note 3 +/- 35000 ps/nm
Note 3: All chromatic dispersion compensation are done at Rx; no Tx chromatic dispersion pre-
compensation.
Full-fill reach on SMF-28, Note 4 1800 km (nominal)
Note 4: Maximum allowed reach is subject to appropriate link engineering analysis. You must follow
the normal link engineering rules.
FEC coding gain 11.3 dB (for best reach performance)

10.7 dB (for best latency performance)
Pre-FEC Signal Fail Threshold (BER) 3.00E-02 (for best reach performance)
2.40E-02 (for best latency
performance)
Power
25 (+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V) or in the full operational voltage range in the case of
AC-powered equipment. For practical purposes, the rounded typical power consumption of an
equipment can be used as the equipment heat dissipation when calculating facilities thermal loads (an
estimate of the long term heat release of the item in a system).

160-9505-900: 4x10GBASE-LR, SMF, 1310nm, 10km, MPO QSFP+

160-9505-900: 4x10GBASE-LR, SMF, 1310nm, 10km, MPO QSFP+
Datasheet provides the 160-9505-900 datasheet.
Table 9-43
160-9505-900: 4x10GBASE-LR, SMF, 1310nm, 10km, MPO QSFP+ Datasheet
10GBASE-LR
PEC 160-9505-900
CLEI WOTRD3JFAA
Pluggable equipment type PQSFP
Application 10 Gigabit Ethernet application
Standards MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3 Clause 52

10GBASE-LR
Transmitter
Note 1: A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this QSFP+.
Transmit average output power, Note 2 -8.2 dBm to 0.5 dBm
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP -6.2 dBm
Transmitter dispersion penalty (TDP), (max) 3.2 dB
Extinction ratio (min) 3.5 dB
Receiver
Note 4: A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this QSFP+.

Table 9-43
160-9505-900: 4x10GBASE-LR, SMF, 1310nm, 10km, MPO QSFP+ Datasheet
10GBASE-LR
Average Rx power range, Note 5 and Note 6 -14.4 dBm to 0.5 dBm
Note 7: Receiver sensitivity is informative.
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), BER -10.3 dBm

not worse than 1E-12
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss in OMA 6.5 dB
Power
Note 9: The typical power consumption values are based on operation in a system operating at an
ambient temperature of 25oC (+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 Vdc (+/-2.5 V).
values must be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.

160-9400-900: 100GBASE-SR4, 4x25G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO QSFP28

specifications provides the 160-9400-900 datasheet.
Table 9-44
160-9400-900: 100GBASE-SR4, 4x25G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-SR4
PEC 160-9400-900
CLEI WOTRDP0FAA
Pluggable equipment type PQSFP28
Standards QSFP28 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3bm-

2015 100GBASE- SR4
Transmitter
Note 1: A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this QSFP28.
Transmit average output power -8.4 dBm to 2.4 dBm
Launch power in OMA minus TDEC (min) -7.3 dBm
Transmitter and dispersion eye closure (TDEC), each 4.3 dB

lane (max)
Transmitter power high alarm threshold 5.4 dBm
Transmitter power low alarm threshold -11.4 dBm
Receiver
Note 3: A single connector is used for both Tx and Rx on this QSFP28.

Table 9-44
160-9400-900: 100GBASE-SR4, 4x25G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-SR4

worse than 5E-5
Receiver power high alarm threshold 2.4 dBm
Receiver power low alarm threshold -10.3 dBm
Optical path

1.8 dB, OM3 fiber
Nominal reach each standard 100 m, OM4 fiber

70 m, OM3 fiber
Power

160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28

160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km
QSFP28 Datasheet provides the 160-9401-900 datasheet.
Table 9-45
160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-LR4
PEC 160-9401-900
CLEI WOTRD2ZFAA
Standards QSFP28 MSA Compliant, IEEE 802.3-2012

100GBASE-LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Launch power in OMA minus TDP (min) -2.3 dBm
Transmitter and dispersion penalty (TDP), each lane 2.2 dB

(max)
Receiver
Connector type LC

Table 9-45
160-9401-900: 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-LR4

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Note 2: .Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Receiver sensitivity (OMA), each lane (max) at 1 E-12 -8.6 dBm

BER, Note 4
Note 4: For Ethernet application, receiver sensitivity is informative.

worse than 1E-12
Optical path
Power

160-9402-900: 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28

160-9402-900: 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28
Table 9-46
160-9402-900: 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP28 Datasheet
PEC 160-9402-900
supported by the QSFP28).
CLEI WOTRD20FAA
Standards QSFP28 MSA Compliant, ITU-T G.959.1 4L1-9D1F

IEEE 802.3-2012
100GBASE-LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Transmit average output power (each -4.3 dBm to 4.5 dBm -0.6 to 4.0 dBm
lane), Note 1
Note 1: Average power for 100GBASE-LR4 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength.

each lane, (max)

each lane
Launch power minimum in OMA minus -2.3 dBm -

TDP (each lane)

Table 9-46

Note 2
Transmitter power high alarm threshold 6.5 dBm 6 dBm
Transmitter power low alarm threshold -6.3 dBm -3.6 dBm
Receiver
Connector type LC

1299.02 nm to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm to 1310.19 nm
Average Rx power range (each lane), -10.6 dBm to 4.5 dBm -10.3 dBm to 4 dBm
Note 3, Note 4, and Note 5
Note 3: Average power for 100GBASE-LR4 is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength.
Note 5: For OTU-4, specified at a BER of 10-6 (pre-FEC), per ITU-T G.sup39.
Note 6: .Power monitor accuracy stated applies to nominal operating power range.
Receiver sensitivity (OMA), each lane -8.6 dBm, Note 7 -

(max) at 1 E-12 BER, Note 7
Note 7: For Ethernet application, receiver sensitivity is informative.

(max), BER not worse than 1E-12, each
lane
Receiver power high alarm threshold 4.5 dBm 4 dBm

Table 9-46
Receiver power low alarm threshold -10.6 dBm -10.3 dBm
Optical path
Power
can be used as the equipment heat dissipation when calculating facilities thermal loads (an estimate of
the long term heat release of the item in a system).
Power Budget (W) 4 (max), Note 9

160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km QSFP28

160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km
QSFP28 Datasheet provides the 160-9403-900 datasheet.
Table 9-47
160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-CWDM4
PEC 160-9403-900
CLEI WOTRD4MFAA
Standards 100G CWDM4 MSA Technical

Specifications, 2km Optical Specifications
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Launch power in OMA minus TDP (min) -5.0 dBm

(max)
Receiver
Connector type LC

1284.5 nm to 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm to 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm to 1337.5 nm

Table 9-47
160-9403-900: 100GE CWDM4, 4x25G, CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 2km QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-CWDM4
Note 2: .Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Receiver sensitivity (OMA), each lane (max) at 5 E-5 -10.0 dBm (max)
BER

worse than 5E-5
Optical path
Power

160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm, 40km QSFP28

160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm, 40km QSFP28
Table 9-48
160-9405-900: 100GE 4WDM40, 4x25G, SMF, 1310nm, 40km QSFP28 Datasheet
100GBASE-4WDM40
PEC 160-9405-900
CLEI WOTREKZFAA
Standards QSFP28 MSA Compliant (SFF-8665, SFF-

8679, SFF-8636)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Lane wavelengths (range) 1294.53 to 1296.59 nm

1299.02 to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 to 1310.19 nm
Total average launch power (max) 12.5 dBm
Average launch power, each lane (max) 6.5 dBm
Average launch power, each lane (min), Note 1 -2.5 dBm (min)
Note 1: Average launch power, each lane (min) is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength. A transmitter with launch power below this value cannot be compliant; however, a value above
this does not ensure compliance.
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane 6.5 dBm (max)
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane, Note 2 0.5 dBm (min)
Note 2: Even if the TDP < 1 dB, the OMA (min) must exceed this value.
Difference in launch power between any two lanes 4 dBm

(OMA) (max)
Launch power in OMA minus TDP, each lane (min) -0.5 dBm

Table 9-48
100GBASE-4WDM40

(max)
Average launch power of OFF transmitter, each lane -30 dBm

(max)
Extinction ratio (min) 4.5 dB
RIN20OMA (max) -130 dB/Hz
Optical return loss tolerance (max) 20 dB
Transmitter reflectance (max) -20 dB
Note 3: Transmitter reflectance is defined looking into the transmitter.
Transmitter eye mask definition {X1, X2, X3, Y1, Y2, Y3} {0.25, 0.4, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.4}
Receiver
Connector type LC
Lane wavelengths (range) 1294.53 to 1296.59 nm

1299.02 to 1301.09 nm
1303.54 to 1305.63 nm
1308.09 to 1310.19 nm
Damage threshold -2.5 dBm
Average receive power, each lane (max) -3.5 dBm
Average receive power, each lane (min), Note 4 -20.5 dBm (min)
Note 4: .Average receive power, each lane (min) is informative and not the principal indicator of signal
strength. A received power below this value cannot be compliant; however, a value above this does not
ensure compliance.
Receive power, each lane (OMA) (max) -3.5 dBm
Receiver reflectance (max) -26 dB
Receiver sensitivity (OMA), each lane (max) -18.5 dBm

@BER=5E-5
Receiver sensitivity (OMA), each lane (max) -15 dBm

@BER=1E-12

Table 9-48
100GBASE-4WDM40
Stressed receiver sensitivity OMA, each lane (max),

Vertical eye closure penalty, each lane; 2.5dB
Stressed eye J2 Jitter, each lane; 0.33UI
Stressed eye J4 Jitter, each lane; 0.48UI -16 dBm
SRS eye mask definition { X1, X2, X3, Y1, Y2, Y3};
{0.39, 0.5, 0.5, 0.39, 0.39, 0.4}
Rx LOS Assert (max) -23 dBm
Rx LOS Assert (min) -30 dBm
Rx LOS Deassert (max) -21.5 dBm
Rx LOS Hysteresis (min) 0.5 dB
Optical path
Power
Power Consumption 4.5 W (max)
Power Budget 4.5 W, Note 5

160-9460-xxx: 103.1G-112.28G, 3m, QSFP28-QSFP28 AOC

160-9460-xxx: 103.1G-112.28G, 3m, QSFP28-QSFP28 AOC Datasheet
provides the 160-9460-xxx datasheet.
Table 9-49
QSFP28
PEC 160-9460-003, 160-9460-005, 160-9460-

007, 160-9460-020, 160-9460-100
CLEI WOPQAE7FAA for 160-9460-003

WOPQAE8FAA for 160-9460-005
WOPQAE9FAA for 160-9460-007
WOPQAFAFAA for 160-9460-020
WOPQAFBFAA for 160-9460-100
Integrated cable 4 pairs of multimode fiber, in a multi-fiber

optical cable
Length 3m for 160-9460-003

5m for 160-9460-005
7m for 160-9460-007
20m for 160-9460-020
100m for 160-9460-100
Pluggable equipment type PQSFP (both ends)
Application Ethernet, OTU4, and OTUCn applications
Standards QSFP28 MSA Compliant
Receiver
Receiver power high alarm threshold 7 dBm
Receiver power low alarm threshold -7 dBm
Power
Typical power consumption (W) 2, Note 2, Note 3

Table 9-49
QSFP28
ambient temperature of 25 degrees C (+/-3 degrees C) and voltage of 54 Vdc (+/-2.5 V).
Note 3: This is the typical power for only one end of the AOC cable as equipped in a QSFP28 port and
the total typical power including both plug ends is 4W.
Power budget (W) 2 (TBD), Note 4, Note 5
operating at an ambient temperature range from 5 degrees C to 40 degrees C at a voltage of 40 Vdc
(+/-2.5 V). These values must be used in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power
draw.
Note 5: This is the budget power for only one end of the AOC cable as equipped in a QSFP28 port
and the total budget power including both plug ends is 4W.
Note: Requires on-host RS FEC working since there is no performance specification defined without
FEC.

xSLM-1-WL3 and OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e transceiver specifications

xSLM-1-WL3 and OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e transceiver specifications provides the
xSLM-1-WL3 and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e transceiver specifications.
Table 9-50
Parameter xSLM-1-WL3 (134-546x-900, - OSLM2-Flex3-WL3e (134-550x-

901, -903, -904, -905) 900, -901, -903, -904, -905, -906,
907)
Transmitter Optical Interface
Laser modulation WaveLogic 3 dual polarization • WaveLogic 3 dual polarization

QPSK modulation QPSK modulation
• WaveLogic 3 dual polarization
BPSK modulation
• WaveLogic 3 dual polarization
16QAM modulation)
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz < 1 MHz
Line rate 137.85 Gbit/s (carried as 34.46 • 137.85 Gbit/s (carried as 34.46
Gbaud dual polarized QPSK) Gbaud dual polarized QPSK)
• 69.21 Gbit/s (carried as 34.61
Gbaud dual polarized BPSK)
• 275.50 Gbits/s (carried as 34.46
Gbaud dual polarization
16QAM)
Tunable wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm (see 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm (see

5400 Switch 100G supported 5400 Switch 100G supported
wavelengths and channels for wavelengths and channels for
a list of supported wavelengths) a list of supported wavelengths)
Tunable wavelength spacing 50 GHz 50 GHz
Central wavelength accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to +4 dBm for all variants -11 to +4 dBm for all variants
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver Optical Interface
Receiver type Balanced Pin Coherent Balanced Pin Coherent
Receiver Back-to-Back -28 dBm (for each channel) (See -28 dBm (for each channel) (See
sensitivity (minimum EOL) Note 1) Note 1)

Table 9-50

901, -903, -904, -905) 900, -901, -903, -904, -905, -906,
907)
Receiver input power out-of- -22.5 dBm (See Note 2) -22.5 dBm
range (OOR) low alarm threshold
Receiver overload +5 dBm (for each channel) (See +5 dBm (for each channel) (See
Note 3 and Note 3) Note 3 and Note 4)
+5 dBm (total power) (see Note 3 +5 dBm (total power) (see Note 3
and Note 4) and Note 5)
Receiver damage level +17Note 3 dBm (total power) +17 dBm (total power) (See
(See Note 3)
Note 3)
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power +/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power
levels >= -10 dBm (See levels >= -10 dBm (See
Note 3) Note 3)
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 11.7 dB (using Ciena proprietary 11.7 dB (using Ciena proprietary
FEC) (See Note 6) FEC) (See Note 6)
Polarization dependent loss 2dB 2dB

(PDL)

Table 9-50

901, -903, -904, -905) 900, -901, -903, -904, -905, -906,
907)
Polarization Mode Dispersion 10 ps [mean DGD] for regional 150 ps [mean DGD] for all
(PMD) tolerance (134-5468-900) variants
10 ps [mean DGD] for metro
(134-5468-904)
30 ps [mean DGD] for ENH PMD
(134-5468-903)
150 ps [mean DGD] for premium
(134-5468-901)
150 ps [mean DGD] for
submarine (134-5468-905)
Chromatic dispersion tolerance +/- 80000 ps/nm for premium/ - 90000 ps/nm to +135000 for
submarine (134-5468-901, -905) premium (134-5550-901)
+/- 40000 ps/nm for regional/ +/- 90000 ps/nm for enhanced
ENH PMD/metro (134-5468-900, (134-5550-903)
-903, -904) +/- 50000 ps/nm for standard/
basic (134-5550-900, -904)
- 90000 ps/nm to +280000 for
submarine (134-5550-905)
Note 1: 16QAM modulation doubles the capacity and spectral efficiency in metro and regional
applications.
Note 2: The minimum for each channel received power level s -20 dBm which does not take into
account any Rx power monitor inaccuracy. For stretched single span applications, -21dBm Receiver
sensitivity is also supported.
Note 3: The maximum for each channel received power level is +5 dBm, which does not take into
account any Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 6: FEC coding gain is 11.7 dB when the OTM4 facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter
is set to OptimizationMode1 (for best reach performance). FEC coding gain is 11.1 dB when the OTM4
facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter is set to OptimizationMode2 (for best latency).

5400 40G DWDM wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)

40G DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) lists the DWDM
frequencies and wavelengths for the 5400 40G circuit packs supporting
tunable transmitters in 50 GHz spacing.
Table 9-51
40G DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm)

(THz) (THz) (THz)
196.25 1527.60 Note 1 194.60 1540.56 192.95 1553.73
196.20 1527.99 Note 2 194.55 1540.95 192.90 1554.13
196.15 1528.38 Note 2 194.50 1541.35 192.85 1554.54
196.10 1528.77 194.45 1541.75 192.80 1554.94
196.05 1529.16 194.40 1542.14 192.75 1555.34
196.00 1529.55 194.35 1542.54 192.70 1555.75
195.95 1529.94 194.30 1542.94 192.65 1556.15
195.90 1530.33 194.25 1543.33 192.60 1556.55
195.85 1530.72 194.20 1543.73 192.55 1556.96
195.80 1531.12 194.15 1544.13 192.50 1557.36
195.75 1531.51 194.10 1544.53 192.45 1557.77
195.70 1531.90 194.05 1544.92 192.40 1558.17
195.65 1532.29 194.00 1545.32 192.35 1558.58
195.60 1532.68 193.95 1545.72 192.30 1558.98
195.55 1533.07 193.90 1546.12 192.25 1559.39
195.50 1533.47 193.85 1546.52 192.20 1559.79
195.45 1533.86 193.80 1546.92 192.15 1560.20
195.40 1534.25 193.75 1547.32 192.10 1560.61
195.35 1534.64 193.70 1547.72 192.05 1561.01
195.30 1535.04 193.65 1548.11 192.00 1561.42
195.25 1535.43 193.60 1548.51 191.95 1561.83
195.20 1535.82 193.55 1548.91 191.90 1562.23
195.15 1536.22 193.50 1549.32 191.85 1562.64

Table 9-51
40G DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm)

(THz) (THz) (THz)
195.10 1536.61 193.45 1549.72 191.80 1563.05
195.05 1537.00 193.40 1550.12 191.75 1563.45
195.00 1537.40 193.35 1550.52 191.70 1563.86
194.95 1537.79 193.30 1550.92 191.65 1564.27
194.90 1538.19 193.25 1551.32 191.60 1564.68
194.85 1538.58 193.20 1551.72 191.55 1565.09
194.80 1538.98 193.15 1552.12 191.50 1565.50 Note 3
194.75 1539.37 193.10 1552.52 191.45 1565.90

(see Note 4)
194.70 1539.77 193.05 1552.93 191.40 1566.31

(see Note 4)
194.65 1540.16 193.00 1553.33 191.35 1566.72

(see Note 4)
Note 1: Applicable only to 40G.
Note 2: Applicable to 40G and 100G.
Note 3: Applicable to 40G, 100G, and 100G Flex3 WL3e.
Note 4: This wavelength is only applicable to:
• TSLM-2-D line module Tunable Coherent DWDM ports-Colorless Optics-Regional
• TSLM-2-D line module Tunable Coherent DWDM ports-Colorless Optics-Enhanced PMD
5400 Switch 100G DWDM wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)

5400 Switch 100G supported wavelengths and channels lists the DWDM
frequencies, wavelengths, and channel IDs for the 5400 Switch 100G circuit
packs supporting tunable transmitters in 50 GHz spacing.
Table 9-52
5400 Switch 100G supported wavelengths and channels
Freq. Wave- Chan. Freq. Wave- Chan. Freq. Wave- Chan.

(THz) length ID. (THz) length ID. (THz) length ID.
(nm) (nm) (nm)
194.60 1540.56 27 193.00 1553.33 59
194.55 1540.95 28 192.95 1553.73 60
196.10 1528.77 93 194.50 1541.35 29 192.90 1554.13 61

Table 9-52

(nm) (nm) (nm)
196.05 1529.16 94 194.45 1541.75 30 192.85 1554.54 62
196.00 1529.55 95 194.40 1542.14 31 192.80 1554.94 63
195.95 1529.94 96 194.35 1542.54 32 192.75 1555.34 64
195.90 1530.33 1 194.30 1542.94 33 192.70 1555.75 65
195.85 1530.72 2 194.25 1543.33 34 192.65 1556.15 66
195.80 1531.12 3 194.20 1543.73 35 192.60 1556.55 67
195.75 1531.51 4 194.15 1544.13 36 192.55 1556.96 68
195.70 1531.90 5 194.10 1544.53 37 192.50 1557.36 69
195.65 1532.29 6 194.05 1544.92 38 192.45 1557.77 70
195.60 1532.68 7 194.00 1545.32 39 192.40 1558.17 71
195.55 1533.07 8 193.95 1545.72 40 192.35 1558.58 72
195.50 1533.47 9 193.90 1546.12 41 192.30 1558.98 73
195.45 1533.86 10 193.85 1546.52 42 192.25 1559.39 74
195.40 1534.25 11 193.80 1546.92 43 192.20 1559.79 75
195.35 1534.64 12 193.75 1547.32 44 192.15 1560.20 76
195.30 1535.04 13 193.70 1547.72 45 192.10 1560.61 77
195.25 1535.43 14 193.65 1548.11 46 192.05 1561.01 78
195.20 1535.82 15 193.60 1548.51 47 192.00 1561.42 79
195.15 1536.22 16 193.55 1548.91 48 191.95 1561.83 80
195.10 1536.61 17 193.50 1549.32 49 191.90 1562.23 81
195.05 1537.00 18 193.45 1549.72 50 191.85 1562.64 82
195.00 1537.40 19 193.40 1550.12 51 191.80 1563.05 83
194.95 1537.79 20 193.35 1550.52 52 191.75 1563.45 84
194.90 1538.19 21 193.30 1550.92 53 191.70 1563.86 85
194.85 1538.58 22 193.25 1551.32 54 191.65 1564.27 86
194.80 1538.98 23 193.20 1551.72 55 191.60 1564.68 87

Table 9-52

(nm) (nm) (nm)
194.75 1539.37 24 193.15 1552.12 56 191.55 1565.09 88
194.70 1539.77 25 193.10 1552.52 57 191.50 1565.50 89
194.65 1540.16 26 193.05 1552.93 58 191.45 1565.90 90
191.40 1566.31 91
191.35 1566.72 92


5400 Packet-Optical Platform
Commissioning and Testing
Copyright© 2010-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
Release 4.5
Publication: 009-3293-221
Document status: Standard
Revision A
Document release date: January 2019
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena
web site at www.ciena.com

009-3293-221 (5400 R4.5 CommTest) RevA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

009-3293-221 (5400 R4.5 CommTest) RevA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5400 Packet-Optical Platform

Commissioning and Testing

009-3293-221 - Standard Revision A

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

3- Hardware and software installation 3-1

4- System operation tests 4-1

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

Change line module port group mode 4-14

5- 5400 Switch cabling 5-1

6- Commissioning, testing, and expansion procedures 6-1

7- Installation data sheets 7-1

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

8- Proper module handling 8-1

9- Optical specifications 9-1

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

About this document 0

This manual provides a detailed description of the turn-up, testing, and

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

• Microsoft is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

• 5430 Hardware Installation (009-3293-201.1)

Document Ordering Information

Additional Product Information

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

New in this release and documentation

This technical publication provides a detailed description of the turn-up,

Release 4.5 Revision A

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

This chapter contains the following information:

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

• The technician must have knowledge of:

OSLM-5-WL3n and OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e 16QAM power considerations

Required tools and equipment

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

Before beginning the commissioning process, fill in:

• Section A: Site Information and pre-test check list

• Section C: Ground tests

This chapter contains the following sections:

For the 5410 Switch

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

Prerequisites - 5430 Switch

Prerequisites - 5410 Switch

5400 Switch power guidelines

Pre-4.0 LMs (<120G) Supported Supported Supported

OSLM-5-100G Supported Supported

OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e QPSK and 16QAM Supported

OSLM-5-WL3n Supported as listed in Supported

5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing

PDU Feed Number of OSLM-5-WL3n Number of

Pre-4.0 LMs (<120G) Supported Supported Supported Supported

OSLM-5-100G Supported Supported Supported

OSLM-2-Flex3-WL3e QPSK supported Supported

OSLM-5-WL3n Supported as Supported

PDU Feed Number of OSLM-5-WL3n Number of